Sharp PDAs Smartphones IQ 8900 User Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Congratulations on purchasing the  
unit.  
Please read this operation manual thoroughly to  
familiarize yourself with all the features of the unit and to  
ensure years of reliable operation. You may also find it  
useful to keep this operation manual on hand for  
reference.  
l
The only difference between the IQ-8900 and the  
IQ-8920 is memory capacity.  
l
Unless otherwise specified, the text and materials in  
this manual apply to both models,  
One of the models or certain accessories described in  
this manual may not be available in your country when  
you purchase this product.  
Check with your local SHARP dealer concerning  
availability.  
All company and/or product names are trademarks and/or  
registered trademarks of their respective manufacturers.  
l
SHARP strongly recommends that separate permanent  
written records be kept of all important data. Data may  
be lost or altered in virtually any electronic memory  
product under certain circumstances. Therefore,  
SHARP assumes no responsibility for data lost or  
otherwise rendered unusable whether as a result of  
improper use, repairs, defects, battery replacement, use  
after the specified battery life has expired, or any other  
cause.  
NOTICE  
l
SHARP assumes no responsibility, directly or indirectly,  
for financial losses or claims from third persons  
resulting from the use of this product and any of its  
functions, such as stolen credit card numbers, the loss  
of or alteration of stored data, etc.  
l
The information provided in this manual is subject to  
change without notice.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Open  
Press the lock button and  
open the unit.  
To remove the touch pen,  
which is installed at the front  
right of the unit, pull in the  
direction indicated.  
To replace the touch pen,  
slowly push the pen point  
back into place (push in the  
opposite direction to that  
indicated), then check the  
pen is safely secured.  
Take  
to ensure the  
ridge grip on the touch  
pen aligns correctly with  
the mounting slot.  
Caution:  
Use only the attached touch pen to operate with the  
display.  
Do not use a pencil or any other sharp pointed object,  
and always keep the point of the touch pen and the  
display clean, to prevent scratching and damage to the  
display.  
The display can be adjusted  
to any angle to make reading  
easy.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1
Set the battery replacement switch  
on the back of the unit to “REPLACE  
BATTERIES” (exposing the red dot).  
(Fig. 1)  
2
q
Slide off the operation battery cover.  
(Fig. 1)  
replacement  
switch  
Insert the two batteries atop the  
ribbon tab, as shown. (Fig. 2)  
3
c l  
Replace the operation battery cover.  
(Fig. 3)  
4
c l  
Set the battery replacement switch to  
“NORMAL OPERATION”. (Fig. 3)  
5
If this is the first time you have  
installed batteries in your unit,  
proceed to the following steps.  
While holding down the  
key  
on the keyboard, push the RESET  
button on the back of the unit using  
the touch pen or a similar object.  
7
When a message appears, touch  
completely clearing the memory.  
to initialize the unit,  
On average, you can expect to get about two months of  
battery life based on one hour a day of constant use. Actual  
battery life will vary depending on individual use.  
See “Getting the Unit Up and Running,” Chapter 1, for  
details.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Before using the unit, you should adjust the touch panel to ensure  
optimal response when touching or writing on the display.  
Press  
touch  
and then  
to open the  
1
q
TOOLS menu.  
Touch [ADJUST LCD  
on the TOOLS menu and  
then touch  
2
&
c l  
.
.
at the left  
DAI LY ALARMS  
MORE TOOLS  
ADJUST TOUCH  
on  
the submenu.  
Touch all four of the  
3
cross-points with the touch  
pen.  
ADJUST TOUCH PANEL  
Please t ouc h t he  
all f our cross-poienxtsa c twith theof  
Note: If the display is not  
cleared from the screen,  
verify that you have  
organizer’s pe n.  
touched each point.  
(Points that have been  
touched appear gray.)  
See “Getting the Unit Up and Running,” Chapter 1, for more details.  
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
You may find it necessary to adjust the LCD contrast to suit certain  
lighting conditions.  
Press (MENU) and then  
touch  
to open the  
TOOLS menu.  
ä
1
2 Touch  
q
on the menu, then touch  
ADJUST LCD CONTRAST] on  
the submenu.  
3 Touch the buttons to  
adjust the contrast to your  
liking.  
ADJUST LCD CONTRAST  
To a dj us t t he LCD c ont r a s t ,  
Pr e s s  
or  
Note: If dark, horizontal  
lines appear on the  
Not e : You c a n  
he r e directly  
whe n t he uni t igseotf f by holding down  
t he [ MENU] ke y a nd t he n  
display, then you have set  
the contrast too dark.  
Simply lighten it until the  
lines disappear.  
pr e s s i ng t he [ ON] ke y.  
Touch  
when you are finished.  
See “Getting the Unit Up and Running,” Chapter for more details,  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
q
Press  
and touch  
We l c ome !  
(If the demo has already  
been disabled, select SET  
CLOCK from the TOOLS  
menu, then select  
a l l  
l i f e  
ADJUST TIME/DATE from  
the submenu.)  
Touch  
to set your  
home city.  
3
Press the first letter of the  
name of your home  
c l  
CHANGE  
HOME CI TY  
country, then press  
until you find a city in your  
time zone.  
. NORFOLK .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. .CI. .TY .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
..  
.
.
.
.
.
..  
.
.
..  
..  
.
..  
.
.
.
.
.
.
..  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
4
Touch the city to select it  
and then touch  
c l  
Type the correct time and  
then press  
twice.  
(For example:  
for  
AM.)  
Type the correct date and then touch  
(For example:  
3, 1994.)  
(5)  
for May  
See “Getting the Unit Up and Running,” Chapter 1, for more details.  
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Your unit comes with a built-in demo which is turned on by default.  
You will most likely want to shut this off at this time.  
Press  
and then  
touch  
to open the  
TOOLS menu.  
ORGANI ZER  
a
de mo  
2
Touch  
START-UP DISPLAY].  
3
Touch OFF in the box next  
to START-UP to disable  
the demo start-up display.  
q
SET  
If you want your name, number  
and address to be displayed on  
start-up, touch ON instead of OFF.  
START- UP DI SPLAY  
START- UP  
. . USER'. . S. . .P.I. . CTURE.  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. [. Pa.s. t . e. pic t . u. r. .e . . he. r . e.].  
. USER'. S.  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
GLOBE is the default start-up  
display. To paste in a picture you  
have copied from Scrapbook,  
select USER’S and then  
. ASK .  
. . ON .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. OWNER. .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
TEL. . NUMBER .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
ADDRESS  
type  
.
Type in your name, number, and-  
address here.  
q
Touch  
to save all the changes.  
See “Setting the Start-Up Display,” Chapter 9, for more details.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Note: The procedures described in the example below can be used  
in many of this unit’s applications.  
1
Press  
.
Touch here to store the  
entry into memory.  
Touch here to cancel  
the new entry.  
2
Press  
c l  
Type in a name, press  
, type in a number,  
3
press  
, then type in  
. NUMBER.  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
"
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
I
.
.
ADDRESS  
an address.  
Use  
to move to the next  
line within a field.  
Use a n ord  
t
h
e
cursor keys to correct mistakes.  
Simply touch a field name to  
select the field for data entry.  
The dark outlines around a  
field indicates that it is selected.  
Touch  
when  
4
you are finished.  
See “Making a New Entry,” Chapter 2, for more details.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
q
Press  
.
c l  
Take the pen and write a  
note on the display.  
Press  
when you  
are finished drawing.  
Now you can close the Scrapbook by pressing another application  
key or press to create other drawings.  
Other Scrapbook Features  
t
Use  
Use  
,
o
view other scrapbook entries.  
to access other features.  
Touch  
Touch  
See “The Scrapbook Application,” Chapter 6, for more details.  
10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1
Touch the day you wish to  
make an appointment on.  
2
Press  
3
c l  
Touch the time bar at  
time the appointment  
begins, then touch it again  
at the time the  
4
q
appointment ends.  
You can also use the keyboard to  
enter the times if your  
appointment does not fall on the  
hour or half-hour.  
DATE:. . M/. D/. .Y=.  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
"
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
..  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
TIME:.. ..  
:
:
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Press  
and  
5
type in a description.  
(Example: “Meeting with  
Pat”)  
If you want to set an alarm to  
remind you of the appointment,  
Touch  
to store the entry into memory.  
6
E l  
See “The Schedule Application,” Chapter 3, for more details.  
11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appointment times and dates can frequently change. Rather than  
re-typing the information, you can easily change an appointment  
stored in the unit.  
Find the Schedule entry  
you want to move.  
Press  
Press  
DATE:. . J. .AN .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
TI ME:  
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Meeting with Pat  
and type in the  
new date (if the date has  
been changed).  
Press  
to move to the  
time field and touch the  
time bar at the time the  
appointment begins, then  
touch it again at the time  
the appointment ends (if  
the time has been  
DATE:. . MAR .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
TI ME:  
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Meeting with Pa t  
changed).  
Touch  
to save the changes.  
Note: You can also use the Cut and Paste functions to move an  
See p. 207.  
See “The Schedule Application,” Chapter 3, for more details.  
12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
You can assign the task a priority using a  
single character. (0 9 or A Z).  
q
Press  
.
Type in a due date here if the To Do  
item has one.  
Press  
Type in a description.  
Fr a nk a bout Sa l e s  
4
q
If desired, type in any  
other information.  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
can assign up to 5 categories to a task, then  
later use these to filter the item in a To Do list.  
Touch  
when you  
are finished.  
Pick up Theater  
. . . . . .F. . .i.n. . i. .s. h. . . . .r. .e. .p. .o. . r. .t. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
. . . . . . . . . . . . .  
. .  
You can now press  
to  
see a list of all your To Do  
items or you can review them  
in the Calendar views.  
See “The To Do Application,” Chapter 3, for more details.  
13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
q
Press  
.
c l  
2
Type in any word stored in  
an entry that you want to  
search for.  
c l  
all  
You can use up to 16 characters  
(letters, numbers, symbols, etc.).  
If you highlight a word in an entry  
with the pen and then press  
,
that word will automatically  
appear in the search word box.  
Select the application you  
want to search.  
DATE: MAR 15 1994  
The application you were using  
last will always be the default  
application.  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
TI ME:  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
to begin  
4 Touch  
searching (or touch  
to search in ail applica-  
tions).  
until you find the entry you are looking for, then  
5 Touch  
r l  
See “General Operation,” Chapter 2, for more details.  
14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The Index modes for Tel, User File, Outline and Notebook are very  
similar.  
Select an application and  
go to the Index mode.  
1
Touch one of these tabs to select  
the file.  
Touch these tabs to jump to  
these alphabetical listings.  
Touch  
with a desired  
.
name highlighted or touch a  
name twice to view a particular  
in full.  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
..  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
I
I
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Press  
to edit the  
selected entry, or press  
to delete the selected entry.  
TEL  
1
TEL  
2
TEL  
3
Type the first few letters of  
an entry to begin the Go  
To search.  
Touch  
to jump to the entry that starts with these letters.  
until you see the entry you are looking for.  
q
Press  
See “General Operation,” Chapter 2, for more details.  
15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The Calendar consists of 5 different views: a 3-month, l-month,  
week, -week (graphical), and a -day view. These views allow  
you to see information stored in Schedule, Ann and To Do.  
to display the  
1 -month view.  
Exclamation points indicate1  
To Do items.  
Reversed dates indicate  
Anniversary events.  
Dots indicate appointments.  
Touch to hide Schedule and Ann  
2
Touch a date and then  
information so that only To Do  
information is visible. Touch again to  
restore the hidden information.  
touch  
to see more  
details.  
This symbol indicates there  
are more on this day.  
See “The Calendar Application,” Chapter 3, for more details.  
16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Touch  
to see the  
3
details of the selected date.  
7
I TEMS  
WEDNESDAY J AN  
This time bar shows  
when you have appointments  
and when you have free time.  
with  
.
__ __  
. .  
at Royal-  
,,,.....  
.
I
Cha r t f or  
I ,  
( 1)  
Fr a nk a bout Sales-  
up The a t e r  
You can mark To Do items off  
as done by touching here.  
- E  
4
Touch an entry to select it and then touch  
entry’s application.  
to go to that  
Note: The Calendar application only displays information stored in Schedule,  
Anniversary, and To Do. You cannot actually store information in the  
Calendar application.  
If you press  
in any of these views, the unit will assume you want to  
make a new Schedule entry on the currently selected date.  
You can access any of these views directly by pressing (MENU) and then  
touching  
.
See “The Calendar Application,” Chapter 3, for more details.  
17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Find an entry that you wish to change.  
Press [EDIT).  
1
NAME  
NUMBER  
. .J.o. .h.n. . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
. . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Make any necessary  
changes.  
You can also drag the pen over  
text to select it, then cut the text  
and paste it elsewhere, or just  
delete it.  
Touch  
when you are finished.  
If you make a mistake and want to restore the original entry,  
simply touch instead.  
If you want to save these changes as a new entry  
(thus preserving the original) press  
instead.  
See “Editing an Existing Entry,“ Chapter for more details,  
18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Find an entry that you  
wish to delete.  
TEL 1  
Press  
Touch  
to confirm  
the deletion.  
Select an application that you want to delete data from.  
Press  
and then touch  
to open the MODIFY  
menu.  
3 Touch  
DELETION  
.
4
Select which group of information you wish to delete.  
(The selection will vary for each application.)  
See “Deleting Entries from the Unit,” Chapter 2, for more details.  
19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Note: The entry will not be copied or moved to a folder. It is simply  
“assigned” to the folder. Entries assigned to folders can be  
worked with as usual.  
Find the entry you wish to  
TEL  
1
assign to a folder. Be sure  
to display the entry in the  
VIEW mode (not the  
INDEX).  
t h. J ohn  
NAME  
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
4t h  
Yor k, N. Y.  
Touch the folder(s) you  
want to assign this entry to.  
Touch once to select a folder.  
Touch again to cancel a selection.  
You can select multiple folders.  
Note: You can assign entries to  
an unnamed folder and name the  
folder later.  
Touch  
when you finish selecting the folder(s).  
See “The Filer Application,” Chapter 7, for more details.  
20  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The Filer allows you to group your entries into folders, which lets  
you access and manage your information by subject matter instead  
of just by application.  
1
Press  
to access your  
folders.  
Touch a folder to select it.  
Now you can:  
2
c l  
Press  
to name (or rename)  
the folder.  
to have the unit  
Touch  
automatically assign a group of  
entries to the selected folder based  
on a search word.  
to merge the  
Touch  
selected folder with another folder.  
Press  
to send a copy of all  
the entries assigned to this folder to  
another Series unit (via  
infrared transfer). All entries will  
appear in the receiving unit’s “IN”  
folder.  
....................................................................................  
.........................................................................................................................  
...............  
Sales Figure  
...........................................................................................................  
.
.............  
to fax a copy of all the entries in the selected folder (the  
Touch  
CE-FM1 fax/modem and CE-137T level converter are required).  
Touch  
to view  
3
c l  
all the entries assigned to the folder.  
4
To go to the actual entry (VIEW mode), simply touch the entry  
and then touch  
See “The Filer Application,” Chapter 7, for more details.  
21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
You may find a need to copy text from one place to another in the  
unit.  
Go to the entry you  
want to copy text from.  
Drag the pen over a word  
or sentence to select it.  
The text will be displayed in  
reverse  
white on black  
to  
indicate it is selected.  
Press  
to copy  
the text to the clipboard.  
Anything currently on the clipboard  
is replaced with the text you just  
copied.  
Go to the entry you want to  
add the text to.  
Be sure you are in the EDIT mode  
when adding text to an entry.  
DATE: . . FEB. . 1. !4. . 19.9.4.  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
TI ME:  
:
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Lunc h wi t h  
Touch the desired place of  
insertion.  
Press (2nd)  
See “Copying or Moving a Block of Text,” Chapter 7, for more details.  
22  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
In addition to working like a standard calculator, the unit’s  
Calculator can work with numbers stored in an entry.  
Find an entry that you have  
stored numbers in.  
PAGE  
799.504  
1
$79.95 10  
r e n t a l  
CGaa sr oline  
Hotel  
Drag the pen over a  
number to highlight it.  
2
3
F o o d  
T o t a l  
cow  
Press  
to copy  
the number to the clipboard.  
to call  
the Calculator.  
Press  
4
c l  
-Touch if you want to display  
an electronic “print out” to  
check calculations as you  
work.  
PASTE  
Press  
to enter  
5
the copied number to the  
Calculator.  
Perform any calculations  
you desire by touching the  
Calculator’s keypad.  
6
c l  
See “The  
Application,” Chapter 6, for more details.  
23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
My batteries only lasted for two months. Is there something wrong?  
Will lose data in memory when I change the batteries?  
Q:  
A: There is probably nothing wrong with your unit. Battery life will vary from  
user to user. A number of factors will affect battery life, including how much  
the unit is used. The battery life is rated at 70 hours of continuous use.  
Assuming an average of one hour per day of continuous use, you would get  
about 2 months of battery life. Two months indicates heavier usage.  
When you change the main operating batteries, the back-up battery will  
protect data in memory. Be sure to follow the directions carefully when  
changing the batteries.  
An optional battery case is available, which will extend the life of your  
operating batteries.  
I have a SHARP  
Series Organizer. How can transfer my data  
Q:  
from it to this new unit?  
The data format on your new unit is different to that on the 8000 Series  
Organizer. You can get data from the 8000 Series (or 7000 Series) one  
application at a time using one of the following methods:  
A:  
l
If you have your 8000 Series data on a RAM card, do the following:  
Insert the RAM card into the 8900 Series.*  
Turn on the 8900 Series.  
Go to an application (Tel, Schedule, etc.).  
Press  
and then touch PERIPHERALS1 , select IMPORT  
OTHER FORMAT, then select VIA RAM CARD.  
Repeat the last two steps for each application you wish to import.  
l
If you own one of the Sharp Organizer Link software packages for an  
8000 Series Organizer (either for the IBM and compatibles or the  
Macintosh) do the following:  
Hook up the cable to the 8900 Series.  
Turn on the 8900 Series.  
Press (MENU) and then touch  
, select IMPORT  
OTHER FORMAT, then select VIA PC LINK.  
Now use the link software on the PC to send the Information to the  
8900 Series.  
* 8000 Series: IQ-8000, 08200, IQ-8400,  
8900 Series: IQ-8900, IQ-8920  
9000 Series: IQ-9000, IQ-9200  
24  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
l
You can purchase the CE-315L transfer cable. Then do the following:  
Hook up the cable to the 8900 Series and the 8000 Series.  
Organizer.  
Turn on the 8000 Series Organizer and press  
.
Turn on the 8900 Series.  
Go to an application (Tel, Schedule, etc.).  
Press  
and then touch  
, select  
CABLE.  
OTHER FORMAT, then select VIA  
Repeat the last two steps for each application you wish to import.  
Note: Data can only be transferred from an 8000 or 7000 Series  
Organizer to the  
Series unit, and not vice versa.  
The procedures above will not  
Organizer but add to it.  
the existing data on the  
Warning: If you have used free fields in Telephone on your 8000 Series  
Organizer, you must set the number of fields in Telephone on the  
8900 Series to be the same (8) BEFORE transferring the  
information to the 8900 Series. Otherwise the data in the free fields  
will not be transferred onto the 8900 Seires.  
touch  
To do this touch  
,
(or  
and then select  
the number of fields (at least 8) and then touch  
or  
NAME. Enter  
TELEPHONE 3  
N o w g o  
back and import the 8000 Series data. See p. 134,276 and 277.  
Q: I have an older model of the SHARP Organizer and imported the data  
into this unit. But when I went to the Tel application in my new unit, ail  
of my entries looked strange.  
Some words were split in two and some  
lines ended too early. The entries don’t look like this in the other  
Organizer. What can I do?  
A: In certain applications, such as Tel, the number of characters allowed per  
line is different from that of other Organizer models. This means that the  
new line characters you entered in the older Organizer will not produce the  
same formatting in this unit. You will need to edit the relevant entries and  
reformat them by deleting old new line characters and entering new ones.  
Q:  
saw the message “There is not enough memory...”  
an entry. What does this mean?  
trying to store  
A: You have filled your unit with information. Here are some things you should  
try in order to free up some memory:  
25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1. Check your Scrapbook. These drawings take up more memory than  
regular entries. Be sure to delete any notes or drawings that you no  
longer need.  
2. Check for old Schedule items. Delete those you no longer need. You can  
delete  
Schedule entries for an entire month using the Calendar menu.  
Check for completed To Do items. You can delete all completed To Do  
items using the Jo Do menu.  
3.  
If you wish, you can purchase a memory expansion RAM card. You can use  
these cards like floppy disks, keeping several to store your data by subject,  
for example.  
I want to print out my unit information. What do need?  
Q:  
Here are the things you will need:  
A:  
The SHARP  
wireless interface for printers.  
Any parallel PC printer that emulates one of the following printers:  
2.  
Canon  
BJ-1 Oe series  
IBM  
series  
Epson  
Hewlett-Packard  
FX series, LQ series  
LaserJet series  
Most printers, including portable ink-jet printers on the market today,  
emulate at least one of these printers. Check with your local computer  
dealer for more information about printers.  
How can back up my data?  
It is important to always have a back-up of your important information. Here  
are some ways of doing this:  
A:  
l
You can print out a hard copy using the optional accessories. See  
222.  
l
You can back up your entire unit using the IQ-783 256KB RAM card  
(for the IQ-8900) or IQ-784 512 KB RAM card (for the IQ-8900 and the  
IQ-8920). (if needed, you can just as easily restore your information  
back to the unit.) See p. 238.  
l
You can use PC or Macintosh link software either from SHARP or a  
third party. You will also need one of the various PC-Link cables or the  
CE-IR2 wireless interface for computers. Check with your local dealer  
regarding features and availability of these products.  
I can’t seem to turn my unit on. I changed the batteries but still nothing  
happens. What should do?  
A: Check the following before sending the unit in for service:  
26  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
l
Check to see that the CARD LOCK switch is LOCKED and not in the  
RELEASE position. You may have accidentally left it unlocked after  
removing an IC card.  
l
l
l
Check that the battery replacement switch on the back of the unit is in  
the “NORMAL OPERATION” position. If the switch is in the “REPLACE  
BATTERIES” position, the unit cannot be turned on.  
Check or replace the operating batteries, even if you have just replaced  
the batteries. It is possible that the batteries were not fresh when you  
purchased them.  
Press the RESET switch. If the unit has been dropped, for example, it  
may have to be reset. This will not delete your data. If for any reason  
data is missing after resetting the unit, it was lost before you pressed  
the RESET switch. The RESET switch simply re-starts the unit.  
If none of the procedures above works, you will need to send the unit to a  
service center. Check the back page of this operation manual for the location  
of your nearest service center and call for more information.  
Q: What happens if I am working on an entry and the auto power off  
function shuts off the unit before I store the entry?  
A: You will not lose any information. The next time you turn the unit on, the  
Resume feature returns you to exactly where you left off.  
Q: I would like to use the Filer feature but I am afraid of using up memory.  
How does the Filer work? Does it make a copy of each entry?  
A: No. When you assign an entry to a folder in the Filer, it does not use up any  
extra memory. The unit doesn’t actually make a copy of the entry, it simply  
“assigns” the entry to a folder. Entries are still stored in each individual  
application (Tel, Notebook, etc.). The Filer is a great way to organize your  
information and there is no reason not to use it.  
I have an older model 8000 Series 256K Organizer that was about 99%  
full. When I loaded all of the data into my new unit  
and  
checked the memory, it read about 65% full. I expected it to read about  
50% full. What happened?  
A: This unit uses memory differently to other SHARP Organizers, providing  
many more features, formatting capabilities, etc., which require more  
memory. Importing data from another type of unit will require more memory  
on this unit. This amount will vary depending on the number and type of  
records you import.  
27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
What is the Outline application  
Notebook?  
?
Why would I want to use it instead of  
The Outline application allows you to group and categorize information using  
a hierarchical structure. Everyone has a lot of small but important pieces of  
information that have to be memorized or kept track of in a written record, for  
example, important personal information: Social Security number, credit card  
numbers, various ID numbers, account numbers, clothing sizes, etc. Using  
the unit, you could make a number of Notebook entries for each piece of  
information, but a better way to manage the information would be to make a  
single Outline file called “Personal Information.” This file could then contain  
a number of headings (such as Car info., Travel info., Health info., Financial  
info., etc.), under which relevant pieces of information could be stored. This  
makes it easier to access information and prevents your unit from becoming  
cluttered with hundreds of individual entries.  
A:  
Additional Outline files could also be made, including: favorite movie list,  
project management file, To Do lists, price lists, product line-up and  
specification file, business plans, product proposals, and meeting notes.  
Many types of information can be more easily and efficiently managed in an  
Outline structure.  
Another use of the Outline application is document preparation. Many times  
you might want to write a memo, letter, proposal, marketing plan, etc., but  
find it difficult to write an entire document from scratch. The Outline  
application allows you to capture your thoughts and ideas, then rearrange  
and categorize them at any time. You can also copy an Outline file and  
paste it into the Notebook application to finish the document there, adding  
text to the major topics.  
I want to send faxes from my IQ-8900 series unit, but what do I need  
besides the unit itself?  
Q:  
The IQ-8900 series unit has fax software built in, but you will also need the  
PC fax/modem and the CE-137T level converter.  
A:  
Not all PC fax/modems can be used with the IQ-8900 series unit. Contact  
your nearest SHARP dealer for information about compatibility and  
availability of the PC fax/modems. (If the CE-FM1 Fax/Modem is not  
available for use in your country because of the specifications of the  
telephone lines, ignore references to it in this manual.)  
28  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Introduction  
3
Quick Start  
24  
. . . . . . . ..*................*.......  
Answers to Commonly Asked Questions  
29  
37  
39  
41  
42  
Contents  
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
What Your Unit Can Do  
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
About this Manual  
. . . . . . .  
Conventions Used in this Manual  
. . . . . . . . .  
Caring for the unit  
45  
46  
.....................................................................  
Chapter 1 Getting Started  
.......................................................  
Pat-t Names and Functions  
.............................................. 48  
Getting the Unit Up and Running  
Installing the batteries  
48  
48  
49  
51  
..................................................  
......................................................................  
lnitializing  
..........................................................  
Setting the clock  
..........................................  
..........................................  
Turning the unit on and off  
Calibrating the touch panel  
52  
Setting the LCD contrast to suit various lighting  
.....................................................................  
52  
conditions  
Turning  
display.:. ............................... 53  
off the welcome  
54  
.................................  
Turning the key beep on and off  
54  
55  
55  
56  
57  
57  
58  
.........................................................  
Getting to Know Your Unit  
.............................  
Touch buttons and the touch panel  
..................................................................  
Applications  
Menu operation ............................................................  
The keyboard ...............................................................  
...........................................................  
other messages................................  
Display symbols  
Built-in  
help and  
29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
............................................................... 61  
Chapter 2 General Operation  
.............................................................  
...........................................................  
62  
62  
Opening an Application  
Selecting Display Modes  
The Index mode.. ......................................................... 62  
The View mode.. .......................................................... 63  
.............................................................  
The Edit mode  
64  
65  
67  
..................................................................  
Making a New Entry  
...........................................................  
Editing an Existing Entry  
....................................................................  
............................................................................  
Editing Techniques  
67  
67  
68  
68  
Fields  
....................................................................  
The cursor  
................................................................  
Typing in text  
Moving around the display .......................................... 69  
Moving between fields ................................................. 70  
Inserting and overwriting text....................................... 70  
Deleting text.. ............................................................... 70  
Working with blocks of text.......................................... 71  
Scrolling the display ..................................................... 72  
........................................ 72  
Finding Specific Entries in Your Unit  
Using the index mode.. ................................................ 72  
Using keywords.. .......................................................... 73  
By topic ........................................................................ 74  
74  
.........................................................................  
By date  
...................................................  
Deleting Entries from the Unit  
75  
Deleting single entries .................................................  
75  
Deleting entries using the application menu............... 76  
Drawing Using the Scrapbook .................................................. 77  
Using the drawing tools ................................................. 77  
Making new graphic entries  
......................................... 78  
Finding graphic entries ................................................ 79  
Revising graphic entries .............................................. 79  
Deleting graphic entries.. ............................................. 80  
Checking the Time and Date ....................................................  
81  
81  
82  
Checking the Unit’s Memory  
.....................................................  
...............................  
The Tools Menu-the Unit’s Basic Utilities  
30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
85  
...............................................................  
Chapter 3 Time Management  
86  
86  
87  
87  
88  
88  
89  
91  
..........................................................  
The Calendar Application  
............................................  
Selecting a calendar view  
.........................................................  
view.................................................  
..........................................................  
The Monthly view  
The Three-month  
The Weekly view  
..............................................  
The Weekly Graph view  
.............................................................  
The Daily view  
.................  
Finding entries using the Calendar views..  
91  
...........................................................  
Selecting a date  
92  
.................................  
The Calendar application menus  
93  
93  
95  
96  
97  
99  
...........................................................  
The Schedule Application  
......................................................  
Making new entries  
.............................................................  
...................  
Finding entries  
Moving appointments and editing entries  
............................................................  
Deleting entries  
..............................................  
Selecting a specific date  
Making entries for recurring and extended events  
..........................................  
... 100  
102  
103  
alarm  
Schedule  
Setting  
a
..............................  
The Schedule application menus  
104  
104  
107  
109  
109  
112  
117  
118  
.............................................................  
The To Do Application  
....................................................  
Making new entries  
......................................  
............................................................  
Finding and reviewing entries  
Editing entries  
.................................  
Checking off completed entries  
.........................................................  
...........................................................  
Using categories  
Deleting entries  
...................................  
application menus..  
The To Do  
119  
119  
121  
122  
122  
123  
..........................................  
.....................................................  
The Ann (Anniversary) Application  
Making new entries  
...........................................................  
............................................................  
..........................................................  
Finding entries  
Editing entries  
Deleting entries  
.......................................  
The Ann application menus  
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..I.......................... 125  
Chapter  
4
Creating Your Own Database  
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...*.  
126  
The Tel and User File Applications  
31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Selecting a file  
...........................................................  
126  
127  
127  
Making new entries  
....................................................  
Finding entries ...........................................................  
Editing entries ............................................................  
Deleting entries ..........................................................  
Using picture fields ....................................................  
129  
129  
....................................... 132  
The Tel application menus..  
menus.. ............................. 133  
The User File application  
133  
133  
134  
136  
Customizing the Tel and User File Applications .....................  
Changing file names ..................................................  
Configuring fields .......................................................  
Customizing the Index display  
...................................  
Chapter 5 Word Processing and Outlining .......................................  
139  
The Notebook Application .......................................................  
140  
Making new entries  
....................................................  
140  
Making a new entry based on an existing entry.........14 2  
Finding entries  
Editing entries  
Deleting entries  
........................................................... 142  
............................................................  
.......................................................... 144  
144  
Changing the character size on the display..............  
Searching for specific words in the text..  
..................  
145  
146  
Changing character (font) styles  
............................... 146  
Using indents and tabs  
..............................................  
148  
................................... 152  
......................................  
Turning word wrap on and off  
Printing full-size  
The Notebook application menus  
a
document  
..............................  
157  
The Outline Application  
...........................................................  
157  
158  
160  
161  
...................................................  
Creating an outline..  
Finding outlines  
..........................................................  
..................................................  
topics  
......................................................  
Displaying full  
Revising outlines..  
161  
Outline deletion  
Using subtopics  
.......................................................... 165  
.........................................  
(children)  
167  
The Outline application menus.. ................................  
Chapter 6 Desk Accessories  
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
173  
32  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
174  
174  
175  
177  
179  
180  
181  
............................................  
The  
(Calculator) Application  
Performing calculations  
..............................................  
.................................................  
The paperless printer  
.........................................................  
Date calculation  
...........  
Using the Calculator with other applications..  
........................................................  
When E appears  
.................................................  
Calculation examples  
182  
182  
184  
185  
186  
187  
188  
..............................................................  
The Clock Application  
............................................  
Changing the Home city  
..........................................  
Setting the time and date  
Checking the time in a city  
........................................  
...................................................  
Adding a User’s city  
........................................  
Daylight saving time (DST)  
...................................................  
Setting daily alarms  
190  
191  
.....................................................  
The Scrapbook Application  
....................................................  
Making new entries  
192  
192  
192  
192  
193  
194  
195  
.............................................  
Using the drawing tools  
...........................................................  
............................................................  
Finding entries  
Editing entries  
.......................................................  
Selecting an area  
..........  
Moving or copying sections of graphic entries  
......................  
text strings to graphic entries..  
Adding  
..........................................................  
Deleting entries  
menu  
(VIEWS)  
scrapbook application  
................  
The  
.......................... 197  
Chapter 7 Features and Utilities for Added Power  
198  
199  
202  
203  
204  
205  
206  
................................................................  
The Filer Application  
.......................................  
......................................  
......................................  
Assigning entries to folders  
Naming or renaming folders  
Viewing entries via the Filer  
Unassigning entries from folders  
...............................  
..........................................................  
Merging folders  
..................................  
Deleting all entries in a folder..  
folders ............................................................  
Sharing  
207  
......................................  
The Filer application menus  
207  
.........................................  
Copying or Moving a Block of Text  
...................................................... 209  
Copying or Moving Entries  
33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
210  
Creating a New Entry Based on an Existing One . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
211  
Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Date Stamp  
The Time Stamp and  
211  
212  
213  
213  
213  
.........................................................................  
The Word Key  
...........................  
Registering your words or phrases  
........  
Inserting a word or phrase with the Word key..  
...........................................  
Editing a word or phrase  
Deleting a word or phrase  
.........................................  
213  
214  
215  
215  
..................................................................  
The Filter Function  
...................................................  
Turning the Filter on  
.................................................  
Filter off..  
Turning the  
..............................................  
Deleting filtered entries  
216  
. . .  
Special Characters  
219  
........................................  
Chapter 8 Using the Optional Peripherals  
220  
.............................................................  
...............................................................  
The Peripherals Menu  
220  
220  
Application IC Cards  
...................................................  
Installing an IC card  
222  
223  
224  
225  
225  
227  
.............................................................  
the unit..  
from  
Fax  
Printing  
...................................  
unit for printing  
Setting up the  
........................................  
Printing the current display  
..............................................  
single entry..  
Printing  
Printing a specified  
entries ......................................................  
a
........................  
of entries..  
group  
Printing all  
227  
228  
unit.. ......................................................  
from the  
Sending  
..........................................  
Connecting the fax/modem  
.......................................  
.......................................  
options..  
Setting fax/modem  
the Fax directory  
Setting up  
Setting up your personal information for cover  
................................................  
page header  
Sending a fax (Automatic dialing)  
number  
sheets  
..............................  
........................  
Making other changes to the  
..................................  
dialing).  
fax (Manual  
Sending  
Using  
a
..................................................  
sheet..  
a
cover  
...........................................................  
Speed buttons..  
..............................  
information..  
button  
Editing speed  
237  
.....................................  
Making a speed button secret  
34  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
............................  
238  
Enhancing Capabilities Using a RAM Card  
239  
Memory expansion.. ...................................................  
................................ 240  
Backing up data to a RAM card  
..................................  
241  
unit  
another  
Sharing data with  
242  
244  
....................................................................  
Transferring Data  
................  
Transfer between  
Receiving data from units other than  
Series.. ...............................................  
Transferring data to/from a RAM card  
Series units  
249  
the  
251  
..................................................................  
application  
251  
...............  
Exchanging Information with a Personal Computer  
253  
253  
254  
254  
255  
256  
260  
260  
261  
.........................................................................  
Terminal Mode  
.............................................  
Hardware requirements  
............................................  
modem..  
Connecting the  
Opening the Terminal  
Configuring the modem settings  
......................................  
mode  
................................  
.........................................................  
Dialing settings..  
.................................  
Changing dialing entry settings  
............................................................  
call..  
Making  
a
.................................................................  
Hanging up  
262  
263  
264  
268  
270  
271  
..........................................................  
Receiving a call  
On-line operations  
........................  
menus)  
(Terminal  
..............................................................  
Data  
transfer  
.................................................................  
Auto log-on  
...................................................  
Terminal emulation..  
Telecommunications  
........................  
troubleshooting  
273  
.................................................  
About External Power Supply  
274  
.....................  
Peripherals..  
Using  
Remember When  
Points to  
Chapter 9 Personalizing Your Unit  
...............................................................  
279  
....................................................  
280  
280  
281  
The Star&-Up Display  
Setting the start-up display  
Responses to the start-up  
........................................  
display.. ...........................  
282  
283  
................................................................  
The Secret Function  
.............................................  
Registering a password  
Marking/unmarking entries  
............................................  
........................ 284  
as secret  
284  
Accessing secret entries  
35  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Locking the unit..  
........................................................ 286  
Changing or deleting the password.. .........................  
286  
287  
287  
If you forget your password  
.......................................  
RAM cards and the Secret function  
..........................  
Changing the Calendar Display  
Format..................................  
288  
288  
288  
289  
Setting the date format  
..............................................  
Setting the monthly format  
.........................................  
Setting up the Calendar.. ...........................................  
............................................................................................  
Appendices  
291  
A. List of Key Notations  
........................................................  
292  
298  
B. ASCII Control Code Table  
................................................  
C. Resetting the unit  
.............................................................  
299  
299  
All reset operation..  
....................................................  
D. Troubleshooting  
................................................................  
300  
301  
E. Battery Replacement  
........................................................  
General guidelines..  
...................................................  
Replacing the  
Replacing the  
operating  
batteries.. ............................  
302  
304  
memory  
backup battery......................  
F. Specifications..  
..................................................................  
306  
Index  
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
311  
36  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The  
is a full-featured, pocket-size  
information manager with a new, easy-to-use graphical  
user interface, a large, easy-to-read screen, and  
pen-based panel operation. Wireless communications  
capability with other IQ-8900 series units and personal  
computers is built in, and the  
also  
provides fax sending capability.  
To help you better manage your time and appointments,  
you can record appointments, meetings, or any other  
information connected with a date in the Schedule  
application; the To Do application helps you track tasks  
and goals  
arranged in a priority you assign to them;  
the Ann application lets you record important annual  
events such as anniversaries and birthdays; and the  
Calendar can display your Schedule, To Do, and Ann  
entries in a daily, weekly, or monthly format.  
The Tel application can be used like an address book to  
record names, phone numbers and addresses, while the  
User File application is a database for any important  
information, entered into categories you set up. Both can  
be configured to include the information you need most.  
The unit is a word processor as well. The Notebook  
application offers advanced features, including margin  
set, word wrap, and a choice of font size and styles,  
allowing you to use the unit for everything from simple  
note taking to creating a formal, full-size letter. And the  
Outline application lets you enter and organize your  
thoughts and ideas using topics and subtopics, easily  
reorganizing them at any time.  
The unit’s powerful desk accessories include the  
Scrapbook application, which lets you create drawings or  
write notes directly on the display. The Calculator can  
37  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
perform a full range of mathematical functions, and the  
built-in Clock keeps track of both local and international  
time.  
The unit combines quick access to your information with  
the ability to search files using a keyword or heading. The  
Filter function makes it possible to select and work with  
specified entries. And the Filer lets you collect ail entries  
containing information you specify into one location,  
ensuring that ail data on a single topic is at your  
fingertips. You can also “cut and paste” information within  
or between entries and files. And when a printer is  
connected to the unit using the optional  
wireless  
interface, you can make hard copies of your data.  
The IQ-8900 Series also has powerful telecommunica-  
tions functions. Using the optional CE-FM1 Fax/Modem  
and CE-137T level converter, you can send faxes directly  
from the unit (with or without a cover sheet), and transfer  
data to and from other units or to remote computers. And  
the unit can be given even greater capability through the  
use of SHARP application cards. Memory capacity  
can also be expanded using any of the optional RAM  
cards. Features and enhancements such as these,  
coupled with capability and ease of use make the  
IQ-8900 Series one of the most versatile and advanced  
hand-held information managers available in the world  
today.  
38  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
This manual is designed to help you to fully understand the  
capabilities and operations of your unit. The first two  
chapters provide a general introduction and instructions  
about set-up and initialization, including an overview of the  
keyboard, the display, and the operations.  
Other chapters are organized according to the type of task,  
for example, Time Management and Creating Your Own  
Database, so that you can give your attention only to those  
functions and features that meet your particular needs.  
This manual consists of 9 chapters and a set of appendices:  
Chapter 1. Getting Started  
introduces part names and functions, and shows you how  
to set up and initiaiize the unit, including how to install  
batteries and set the built-in clock.  
Chapter 2. General Operation  
introduces you to basic concepts and operations on the  
unit, including opening an application, using menus, and  
the built-in help feature.  
Chapter 3. Time Management  
Explains those features that help you structure your time  
and keep track of appointments and important events: the  
Calendar, Schedule, To Do, and Ann applications.  
Chapter 4. Creating Your Own Database  
Explains the Tel and User File applications, which not  
only store information such as addresses and phone  
numbers, but also can be configured to manage almost  
any type of information.  
Chapter 5. Word Processing and Outlining  
Explains word processing in the Notebook application,  
and how to structure your ideas and writings using a  
simple outline form in the Outline application.  
39  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 6. The Desk Accessories  
Explains drawing using the Scrapbook, and using the  
Calculator and Clock-applications that can be opened  
on the display whenever they are needed.  
Chapter 7. Features and Utilities for Added Power  
Explains how to copy entries and other productivity  
enhancing features and utilities, including quick access to  
information with the Filer application, filtering selected  
entries, and more.  
Chapter 8. Using the Optional Peripherals  
Explains printing using the unit, how to transfer data to  
and from other units (including previous models), how to  
send faxes or exchange data with personal computers  
using the optional fax/modem, and using the optional  
cards.  
Chapter 9. Personalizing your unit  
Explains how to change the opening display and  
Calendar display format, and how to use the Secret  
function and a password.  
Appendices  
A. List of Key Notations  
B. ASCII Control Code Table  
C. Reset  
D. Troubleshooting  
E. Battery Replacement  
F. Specifications  
40  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
onventions  
The following keyboard and symbol conventions are used  
throughout this manual:  
l
and other similar key notations  
indicate “touch buttons” on the display which can be  
activated by touching with a finger or the touch pen.  
(For more information about touch buttons, see p. 55.)  
l
l
(ON), (ENTER) , and other similar notations indicate  
keys on the keyboard that should be pressed to  
perform operations.  
Letters and numbers to be entered in examples are  
shown in italics, for example l unc h indicates that  
l-u-n-c-h should be typed in. Words shown in boldfaced  
letters, such as  
and  
indicate the  
names of applications, functions or menus.  
l
Some keys have more than one function, accessed by  
using them in combination with  
or  
‘H’, for  
example, also accesses the  
screen when the  
(2nd) key is used with it. When a key’s second function  
is referred to in an explanation, only that function is  
shown. For example, the instruction to  
the  
screen would be shown as (2nd)  
, not as (2nd)  
.
l
l
The  
symbol indicates a tip or important point.  
The unit often lets you perform operations in more than  
one way. These alternatives are indicated by the  
sym boi.  
l
Cross-references to other helpful information are  
marked by the  
symbol.  
For a full list of key notation, see Appendix A, p. 292.  
l
in this manual, 8000 Series, 8900 Series and 9000  
Series means the following models:  
8000 Series: IQ-8000, IQ-8200, IQ-8400, IQ-81 OOM,  
IQ-8500M  
8900 Series: IQ-8900, IQ-8920  
9000 Series: IQ-9000, IQ-9200  
41  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
for the unit  
The unit contains sophisticated circuitry and a glass  
display panel which can be damaged if not cared for  
properly. A few precautions should be taken regarding the  
unit’s care so that it will give you many years of reliable  
use.  
Keep the unit away from extreme  
heat. Do not leave it on the  
dashboard of a car or near a heater.  
Do not leave it in any place that is  
extremely damp or dusty.  
Do not drop the unit or subject it to  
severe impact or extreme force.  
Bending the unit beyond its capacity  
can damage the circuitry.  
Do not use extreme force when  
pressing buttons on the display or  
the keys. Do not use any sharp,  
pointed object or your fingernails to  
press them. It is recommended that  
you use only the included touch pen  
to write or to touch the buttons on  
the unit’s display screen.  
Sharp or hard objects can scratch  
the unit. Be careful that it is protected  
when carried with other objects. Do  
not store it loose in a bag or  
briefcase.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Clean the unit only with a soft, dry  
cloth. Do not use solvents.  
Do not carry the unit around in your  
back pocket, as it may break when  
sit down. The display is made of  
glass and is particularly vulnerable.  
Replace the batteries as soon as they become weak (see  
p. 301). Failing to replace weak batteries may result in  
leakage or lost data.  
43  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
This chapter explains everything you need  
to know to set up and begin working with  
your unit, from installing the batteries to  
initialization. The chapter also includes a  
illustration of the parts of the unit,  
and basic explanations of its key features,  
from the keyboard to the touch panel display  
and its symbols.  
45  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
( I N S )  
[
E
N
T
E
R
]
SPACE  
,
46  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Open appropriate applications.  
Shows information, and functions  
Application keys  
Display  
as a  
panel” for navigation,  
data entry, etc.  
External power  
supply pin  
Connects the unit to the  
optional CE-76BC battery case.  
For entry of characters and  
commands.  
Keyboard  
Touch pen holder  
Touch pen  
Use for selecting touch buttons  
and drawing on the touch panel.  
Connects a data transfer cable  
for computer links, modem  
hook-ups, etc.  
cable jack  
r
Reset button  
Use to initialize and reset the  
unit.  
Press to open the unit.  
button  
Locks the installed card into  
the unit.  
IC card lock switch  
Use to eject an IC card.  
IC card eject switch  
back-up battery compartment  
Battery replacement switch  
Secures batteries into the battery  
compartment.  
Operation battery compartment  
For loading an IC card.  
For infrared communications with  
IC card slot  
Infrared port  
other  
Series units, etc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1. Set the battery replacement switch on the back of the unit  
Installing  
the  
to “REPLACE BATTERIES” (exposing the red dot).  
batteries  
the operation battery cover.  
Slide off  
3. Insert the two batteries atop the ribbon tab, positioning  
them according to plus  
shown below.  
and minus  
polarity, as  
4. Replace the operation battery cover.  
5. Set the battery replacement switch to “NORMAL  
OPERATION”.  
The unit must be initialized the first time it is used.  
lnitializing  
1. Press and hold the (ON) key.  
48  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2. While holding down the  
key, push the RESET  
button on the back of the unit using the included touch  
pen or a similar object. The following message will appear.  
Do you really want to initialize  
the organizer’s  
will delete all main data)?  
memory (this  
3. Touch  
to initialize the unit.  
An initial display welcoming you to the unit appears.  
l
If you want to take a tour and have a demonstration of  
some of the features, touch You can  
press to leave the demonstration at any time and  
go back to the initial display.  
l
l
The welcome display is shown each time the unit is  
turned on unless it is set to off (see p. 53).  
To skip the tour, or after finishing it, proceed to setting  
the clock, below.  
In order for the Calendar, Schedule, To Do, and other  
time-based applications to be accurate, the built-in clock  
must be set to the correct city, time and date.  
Setting the  
clock  
1. Touch  
on the welcome display.  
49  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
come!  
ADJ UST  
2. Touch  
A list of cities appears.  
HOME CITY  
P
r
e
s
s
t
o
t o t h e  
u s e r c i t i e s .  
3. If the desired city is not displayed, press  
to display the city.  
or  
4. Touch the desired city to select it and touch  
The ADJUST TIME/DATE window reappears with the  
selected city displayed.  
5. Enter the correct time using the numeric keys on the  
keyboard.  
Enter a zero (0) in front of any single-digit hour or minute  
entries.  
6. Press  
or (PM) (above the top row of keys on the  
keyboard).  
7. Press [NEXT).  
Press  
to select the time system.  
50  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8. Press (NEXT) .  
Enter the correct date in the order of month, date, year.  
Enter a zero (0) in front of any single-digit month or date.  
Use four digits to enter the year.  
Welcome!  
9. Touch  
The city, time, and date are set and the window closes.  
If you want to reset the clock in the future, use the  
TOOLS menu. See p. 182.  
Turning the  
Press ION) to turn the power on and  
to turn the  
unit on and power off. The unit will not operate if the IC card lock  
switch is in the RELEASE position or the battery  
Off  
replacement switch is in the “REPLACE BATTERIES”  
position. Either batteries or the optional CE-76BC battery  
case (see 273) can be used as the unit’s power source.  
Auto power off  
To conserve battery power, the unit will turn itself off if it  
has not been used for about 12 consecutive minutes. In  
order to avoid interrupting data transfers, the auto power  
off function is disabled when communicating with other  
devices.  
If the unit auto powers off before an entry you are  
working with is stored in an application, the data will not  
be lost. When you press (ON), the unit will return to the  
same operating state as before auto power off.  
51  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Each person holds a pen differently. in order for the unit  
to be able to respond properly to your individual style of  
writing, drawing, or selecting touch buttons, the touch  
panel must be calibrated.  
Calibrating  
the touch  
panel  
1. Press  
and then touch  
2. Touch ADJUST LCD.  
A submenu appears.  
3. Touch ADJUST TOUCH PANEL.  
ADJUST TOUCH PANEL  
Pl e a s e t ouc h t he e xa c t c e nt e r of  
al f our c r os s - poi nt s wi t h t he  
or gani zer ' s  
pen.  
4. Touch the center of each of the four crosses with the  
touch pen.  
If the adjustment is successful, “Adjusted!” appears on  
the display. If for some reason the adjustment fails, the  
message “Sorry, please try again” will appear. Touch the  
of all four crosses again until the touch panel is  
calibrated.  
From time to time, the contrast of the LCD display may  
have to be adjusted. You may find, for example, that a  
contrast setting that was fine for the home or office is not  
adequate when outside or on an airplane. Follow the  
procedure below to adjust the LCD contrast.  
Setting the  
LCD  
trast to suit  
various  
lighting  
conditions  
1. Press  
and then touch  
.
2. Touch ADJUST LCD.  
A submenu appears.  
52  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3. Touch ADJUST LCD CONTRAST.  
ADJ UST  
CONTRAST  
To adjust the LCO c ont r a s t ,  
Pr e s s or  
' Not e : You c a n ge t he r e di r e c t l y  
whe n the unit is off by holding down  
[ MENU] key and t hen  
' pr es s i ng t he [ ON] key.  
4. Adjust the contrast by touching  
or  
5. Touch  
when you are satisfied with the contrast.  
If for some reason the display is too light or dark for you  
to read the display and operate the unit, you can access  
the contrast adjustment directly by turning off the unit,  
then holding down  
on the keyboard while  
and to darken or  
pressing  
Press  
lighten the contrast.  
Turning off  
the welcome  
display  
You may find that after taking a tour of the unit and  
seeing a demonstration of its features once or twice, you  
want to turn off the welcome display.  
1. Press  
and then touch  
2. Touch SET START-UP DISPLAY.  
The SET START-UP DISPLAY window opens.  
3. Touch OFF in the box next to START-UP.  
START- UP DI SPLAY  
[ Pas t e pi ct ur e her e.].  
USER' S  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. ASK  
. ON.  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.. .. ..  
.
.
.
"
OWNER  
.
.
.
.
.
.
TEL NUMBER  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
ADDRESS  
53  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
If you make a mistake, touch  
4. Touch  
The welcome display is now disabled.  
and start again.  
For more information about configuring the start-up  
display, see p. 280.  
Turning  
the key  
beep on  
and off  
The unit can be set to make a sound (a beep) each time  
a key or button is pressed. The default setting is on,  
indicated by on the display. You can use the TOOLS  
menu to change the setting.  
1. Press  
and then touch  
2. Touch MORE TOOLS and then touch KEY SOUND  
ON/OFF.  
A submenu appears. The current setting is marked with  
an asterisk.  
d e m o  
t
o
t h e t i m e  
s
t
a
r
t
3. Touch KEY SOUND OFF.  
The key beep is now turned off and disappears.  
Getting to Know Your Unit  
A major advantage of this unit is its graphical user  
interface, which displays commands and can carry out  
functions through a combination of graphical images and  
text. The graphical user interface is not only easy to use,  
it also gives you a great deal of versatility, since many  
54  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
operations can be carried out using the touch pen on the  
display, keys on the keyboard, or a combination of the  
two.  
The unit’s display not only shows information, it is also a  
Touch  
buttons and “touch panel” which can respond to the touch of a finger  
the touch  
panel  
or the touch pen to call up functions and execute  
commands. The icons on the display are “touch buttons”  
which allow you to access various operations simply by  
touching the desired button.  
Many operations which are carried out using the touch  
buttons can also be carried out using keys on the  
To store an entry, for example, you can touch  
on the display or press  
on the  
keyboard.  
Keyboard alternatives are shown on some touch  
buttons.  
l
For example  
shown as  
in  
the manual, indicates that you can touch  
on  
the display or press  
on the keyboard.  
l
When a symbol on the display matches a key or  
symbol on the keyboard, either can be used to perform  
the same operation. For example function  
the same as  
.
Applications  
Currently selected application  
r
FEE 14 1994  
TI ME:  
.
.
.
Shar per Meet i ng at t he  
Alto Hotel  
55  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Operations on the unit are performed using “applications.”  
The unit’s Calendar and Schedule, for example, are  
applications-they perform an operation and accomplish  
a task based on your directions. To open an application,  
select it by pressing the appropriate key on the left of the  
display.  
When working in one application, you can switch to  
another application simply by pressing that application  
key. Data being processed in the first application will, in  
most cases, be preserved and the operation can be  
completed when the application is selected again. In  
cases when an operation or procedure cannot be  
completed, a warning message will indicate this and give  
you the option of remaining in the application.  
Menu  
operation  
Another powerful aspect of the unit’s graphical user  
interface is its system of menus, which can be used to  
quickly execute commands and perform operations. With  
the exception of the Clock, two “universal” menus  
PERIPHERALS and TOOLS  
can be accessed from  
any application. In addition, except for the Clock, all  
applications have VIEWS and MODIFY menus, with  
specific functions and selections that are unique to each  
application.  
To change the display view, touch  
and select  
the desired view from the menu. To modify entries, for  
example to delete one or several entries, touch  
and select the desired operation. When you  
want to perform an operation in another menu, you can  
move between the four menus (PERIPHERALS and  
TOOLS, VIEWS and MODIFY) using the  
and  
keys.  
56  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
that cannot  
be accessed from a  
current menu are  
shown dimmed.  
that there  
is a submenu for  
that menu item.  
To do application menu  
The unit’s keyboard is laid out in a standard format, much  
the same as on a typewriter or computer. functions  
The  
keyboard  
the same as the Shift key on a typewriter or computer,  
and (CAPS) the same as a Caps Lock key.  
l
l
l
Functions (MOVE and  
activated when using the Outline application-it is not  
necessary to press any other key.  
are automatically  
Symbols in white above a key such as or : can be  
accessed by holding down  
appropriate key.  
and then pressing the  
Functions in blue above a key, such as HELP, can be  
accessed by pressing the key after  
There is no need to hold down  
the other key.  
is pressed.  
while you press  
Special symbols and characters, such as and can  
also be entered on the unit using  
explanation, see p. 216.  
. For a full  
The following symbols appear at the top of the screen  
indicating various operating conditions.  
Display  
symbols  
The operating batteries are weak and need  
to be replaced (see p. 302).  
CARD  
EDIT  
An IC card is currently being used.  
The current entry is in the Edit mode.  
57  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2nd  
The  
key has been pressed.  
has been pressed. In caps lock  
CAPS  
mode, all typed letters will be in uppercase.  
Press  
to turn off caps lock.  
This symbol indicates that the current entry  
is marked as “secret” and can only be  
accessed when the unit is unlocked (see p.  
282).  
The unit is locked. Entries marked as secret  
cannot be recalled without first entering the  
password and unlocking the unit (see p. 282).  
The key sound is on (see p. 54).  
All alarms are enabled. When this symbol is  
not shown, the alarm sound for any set  
alarms is disabled (see p. 189).  
They indicate that all information in an entry  
cannot be shown at one time on the display.  
There is additional information in the  
direction indicated, which can be viewed  
using the cursor keys.  
Built-in help  
and other  
messages  
The unit has a built-in help feature which acts as a  
convenient, on-line reference manual. You can call up  
the Help feature at any time simply by pressing (2nd)  
(HELP) . On-line help is an extensive resource, so not all  
the information available may fit on one display. Use  
or  
to scroll the information, then touch  
when you want to return to the regular display.  
During the course of normal operations, the unit will  
display several different messages to guide you through  
these operations. Many of these messages will give you  
a choice of commands or ask you to confirm important  
operations, while others will simply display information for  
you to read. In most cases, you must make a selection  
or simply acknowledge the message before continuing.  
58  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Other messages will flash information briefly and then  
disappear.  
Ther e is not enough memor y s pace  
r e ma i ni ng.  
Please t r y again a f t e r f r e e i ng up  
s ome me mor y s pa c e .  
Touch to proceed.  
I
Out of memory  
you really  
all  
1 entries  
‘Touch to proceed.  
Cancels the operation.  
I
Delete confirmation  
59  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
60  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
I
J
In this chapter you will learn most of the  
unit’s basic operations. The Tel and  
Scrapbook applications will be used for the  
examples. However, most of the techniques  
described here can be applied to all of the  
built-in applications. Each application is  
described in detail later on in the manual.  
For a full explanation of the Tel application,  
see p. 126.  
For a full explanation of the Scrapbook  
application, see p. 190.  
61  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Opening an Application  
To start using an application, simply press the desired  
key, located to the left of the display. Each time you  
(ANN),  
press [CAR),  
(NOTEBOOK),  
[SCRAPBOOK) or  
, the selected application will  
appear. Any application open on the display will now be  
hidden when a new application is selected. You can  
always return to another application at the exact point  
where you left off simply by pressing its key again. Only  
one application will ever be visible at a time. The Clock  
is displayed only while  
is pressed.  
Selecting Display Modes  
Once an application is open, you can switch between  
three basic display modes: Index, View, and Edit. Each  
display mode has its own unique appearance and  
particular purpose.  
The  
Calendar, and Clock applications do not have  
Index, View, or Edit modes.  
The Index mode shows you a one line view of each entry.  
From this you can easily find a particular entry. This is  
the default view the first time you use an application or  
when there are no entries in a particular application.  
The Index  
mode  
62  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Touch to view the  
currently selected entry.  
Touch these tabs to  
select another section  
of the alphabet.  
Touch these tabs to  
switch between  
different files.  
Accesses entries  
that do not begin  
with letters.  
The currently  
selected entry.  
Touch to view  
the entire  
EL3  
Steagle Bill  
entry.  
Robe l t  
.
Edwa r d  
Swa ns on  
,
.
.
.
.
.
.
Touch any  
entry once to  
select it or  
twice to view  
its details.  
Symone , Ba r ba r a  
ler, He nr y  
Phil  
i .  
.
Other operations from the keyboard:  
Creates a new entry (Edit mode).  
Edits the currently selected entry (Edit  
mode).  
Deletes the currently selected entry.  
Displays the currently selected entry in  
the View mode.  
Displays any previous/subsequent  
entries not shown.  
Selects an entry.  
The View  
mode  
The View mode shows a single entry in its entirety.  
Assigns  
an entry to Filer  
folders (see p. 201).  
TEL  
1
Switches to the Index  
mode.  
th . .J.o. .h. .n. . . . . . ...!  
.N. .A. M. .E. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
NUMBER  
ADDRESS  
. . . . . . . .  
4t h  
U. S. A.  
New Yor k,  
63  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Other operations from the keyboard:  
Creates a new entry (Edit mode).  
Edits the currently displayed entry  
(Edit mode).  
( i i )  
Deletes the currently displayed entry.  
S e q u e n t i a l l y d i s p l a y s t h e p r e v i o u s /  
following entries.  
The Edit  
mode  
Entries are made and all editing and corrections are  
carried out in the Edit mode.  
Clears an entry or operation without storing it.  
Stores an entry to the  
memory.  
. indicates the  
selected field.  
cursor.  
Other operations from the keyboard:  
Clears a selected field.  
( C A N )  
Clears an entry or operation without  
storing it.  
( ENTER)  
Stores an entry to the memory.  
Moves the cursor.  
Selects a field.  
64  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Making a  
In the Index or View mode, pressing  
blank form for creating a new entry.  
opens a  
Make the following new Tel entry:  
John Smith  
20 l-529-8200  
Name  
Tel.  
20 I-529-9695  
Fax.  
123 Main Street, Mahwah, NJ 07430  
Address  
1. Press  
to open the application.  
The application opens in the Index mode.  
2. Press  
on the keyboard.  
A blank form opens in the Edit mode.  
NAME  
.NUMBER  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
ADDRESS  
3. Type in the name Smith, John.  
4. Press to move to the NUMBER field.  
Touch NUMBER to move to the field.  
.
5. Type in 201-529-8200 and then press  
Notice that  
of the field box has been automatically adjusted.  
65  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
th, John  
NAME  
6. Type in 201-529-9695 FAX.  
7. Press to move to the ADDRESS field.  
Touch ADDRESS to move to the field.  
8. Type in 123 Main Street followed by  
Type in Mahwah, NJ 07430.  
. N. . .A. ME . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...! . . . . . . . . .t. .h. . . . .J. . o. . .h. . .n. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
l-529-82004  
NUMBER  
FAX  
I
I
9. Press  
to store the entry.  
Touch  
The message “Stored!” will appear briefly. The entry is  
now stored in memory and displayed in the View mode.  
In order for the fax function to automatically dial a fax  
number, it must be entered in FAX NUMBER field. See  
p. 136 for more information.  
For other useful methods available in the Edit mode, see  
p. 67.  
66  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Editing an Existing Entry  
To edit an entry already stored in memory, you must first  
open the entry in the Edit mode where it was created.  
1. Press  
to open the application.  
2. Select the desired entry in the Index mode or display it in  
the View mode.  
3. Press  
4. Make any necessary changes.  
5. Touch to store the changes when you are  
to open the entry in the Edit mode.  
finished.  
Press (ENTER).  
The new, edited entry is now stored, replacing the original  
entry.  
Editing Techniques  
This section explains all the general editing techniques  
used in the Edit mode when making a new entry or  
editing an existing entry in all of the applications. (The  
Notebook application has many additional features for  
working with text; see p. 140 for more information.)  
Fields  
Most applications divide the display into field boxes. The  
number of fields in each application varies, as do the  
types of fields. The different field types include text  
fields, a date field, time field, and picture field. There are  
also a few other special types of text fields. You can  
define the number, type, and names of fields in the Tel  
and User File applications (see p. 133).  
You can type any character into a text field. The size of a  
67  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
text field is limited only by the size of the entry. Text  
fields adjust their size automatically to accommodate the  
number of lines entered.  
Only a date can be entered in a date field, usually in the  
format of  
For example, you would type  
06231994 to enter June 23, 1994.  
Only the time of day can be entered in the time field, in  
the format of HH:MM followed by (AM) or (PM]. For  
example, to enter 9:00 AM, you would type 0900 then  
press (AM].  
You can insert a picture from the Scrapbook into a  
picture field. You cannot enter anything directly into a  
picture field; a picture must be pasted from the  
Scrapbook. A picture can also be deleted from the field.  
See 130 for more information about using picture fields.  
The cursor is used to work with text, indicating the  
position where text will be entered or deleted. The cursor  
is also used to indicate selection items in menus or lists.  
In text fields, where there is no restriction on the type of  
text (letters or numbers) or number of characters (lines)  
that can be entered, the cursor appears as in insertion  
mode, or as in overwrite mode (see p. 70).  
The cursor  
In the date and time fields, the cursor appears as  
indicating that numbers only should be entered in a  
specified format (see above).  
In some text fields or boxes, the cursor appears as  
Typing in  
text  
Typing in text is simple and straightforward. The unit’s  
keyboard is laid out similar to the keyboard on a  
typewriter or computer.  
68  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Letters (lowercase and uppercase)  
Any of the standard letters (A to can be entered by  
pressing the appropriate key. All letters will normally  
Hold down either of the  
appear in lower case.  
keys while pressing letter key(s) to enter upper-case  
letters. functions as a “CAPS lock” key on a  
typewriter or computer. Once pressed, the symbol CAPS  
will appear in the display. Any letters typed while the  
Organizer is in CAPS mode will appear in uppercase. To  
switch back to lower-case mode, simply press  
again. To enter lower-case letters while in CAPS mode,  
hold down  
while pressing a letter key.  
Numbers  
The unit has numeric keys located on the keyboard  
above the letter keys. Regardless of the CAPS mode (on  
or off), pressing these keys will enter numbers. Holding  
down la) while pressing a numeric key will, however,  
enter the symbol printed above that key.  
Symbols  
The symbols that appear in white above certain keys can  
be entered directly from the keyboard. Holding down  
(al while pressing a key will allow you to enter these  
symbols. One symbol, the semicolon, can be entered by  
first pressing (2nd) and then the  
key. In addition, a  
number of special symbols are available by pressing  
(see p. 216).  
Moving  
around the  
display  
When working in an entry, the easiest way to move the  
cursor to a specific location on the display is to touch the  
location with the pen. The cursor will immediately move  
to the selected position.  
You can also move the cursor around the display with the  
cursor keys  
I,),  
and  
This may  
sometimes be more convenient when you are working  
from the keyboard. In addition, you can hold any cursor  
key down for rapid movement.  
69  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The following convenient key combinations are also  
available in the Edit mode:  
oves the cursor to the end of the line.  
Moves the cursor to the beginning of the line.  
Moves the cursor to the first line of a field (or  
the last line of the previous field if the cursor  
is already positioned on the first line of a  
field).  
Moves the cursor to the last line of a field (or  
the first line of the next field if the cursor is  
already positioned on the last line of a field).  
Moving  
between  
fields  
In addition to the methods described above, you can  
move the cursor directly to the next field in an entry by  
touching the desired field name on the display, or by  
pressing (NEXT) or  
. In either case, the cursor  
moves to the beginning of the desired field.  
Inserting and To insert text into existing text, move the cursor to the  
overwriting  
text  
character you wish to insert text in front of and begin  
typing. Insertion mode is the unit’s default setting,  
indicated by the triangle cursor  
To switch to the  
overwrite mode, press (INS] . Any text you enter will  
replace existing text. The cursor appears as in the  
overwrite mode.  
Deleting text  
If you make a mistake while entering text, use the  
following keys to delete the mistake, then enter the  
correct text:  
BS  
Deletes the character behind the  
cursor.  
Deletes the character under the cursor.  
Deletes the entire line the cursor is on.  
Clears the currently selected field.  
Except in the Notebook and Outline  
applications.  
70  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Working with It is easy to work with blocks of text on the unit. The first  
q
step is to select the text to work with.  
blocks of  
text  
1. Hold the touch pen at the beginning of the text and drag  
it over the entire text that you want to work with. This will  
“highlight” the text (display it in reverse-white on black).  
Take the pen off the display when the desired text is  
highlighted.  
. FAX .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
2. You can now perform a number of operations on the  
selected text:  
or  
Deletes all of the selected text.  
Copies the selected text to the  
clipboard so that it can later be pasted  
to another location.  
Deletes the selected text from its  
current location and moves it to the  
clipboard.  
Replaces the selected text with  
whatever is currently in the clipboard.  
Once text is selected, any new text that is typed in will  
replace the selected text.  
You can also delete selected text using DATA DELETION  
from the menu.  
For a full explanation of the Cut/Copy/Paste functions,  
see p. 207.  
71  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Scrolling  
the display  
If there is more information than can be displayed at one  
time, or will appear on the top of the display. The  
arrows indicate the direction you need to scroll in. Press  
or  
to scroll the information one line at a time.  
Finding Specific Entries in Your Unit  
There are a number of ways that you can locate entries  
and information in your unit.  
Using the  
Index mode  
The Index mode shows you a listing of all your entries in  
a particular application.  
1.  
2.  
3.  
Press the desired application key.  
Go to the Index mode if it is not displayed.  
Select the file that the entry is in by touching the  
appropriate tab.  
4.  
Use the letter tabs to jump to a particular place in the  
alphabet.  
You can also jump to a specific entry by entering the first  
letters of the entry. A GO TO window will open, filled in  
with the letters you typed.  
Touch  
to jump to that entry.  
72  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5. If the entry is still not displayed, press  
to scroll the list of entries.  
and  
6. When the desired entry is displayed, select it and touch  
to see the entry in full.  
If you have no idea where an entry is or what letters it  
begins with, you will want to use the Search function.  
For example, suppose that you find a phone number  
without a name and you want to know whose number it is.  
Using  
keywords  
1. Press (SEARCH).  
The SEARCH window will open.  
SEARCH  
I
-
c o n t a i n i n g :  
The application you were  
previously using is selected  
to be searched by default.  
2. Enter the phone number you have found. Type  
To search only secret entries (see  
SECRET ONLY box.  
touch the  
this application to search and  
the search operation. If you  
are not sure about the application, touch SEARCH ALL]  
to search all applications.  
The unit will now display the first entry that contains the  
text, or “keyword,” that you entered.  
73  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
J.o.hn. .  
. NAME. .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. . . . . . . .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
NUMBER  
If there is more than one entry that contains the keyword,  
touch  
Then touch  
until you find the entry you are looking for.  
when you have finished searching.  
If you highlight text in an entry before pressing  
, the text is automatically entered as a keyword.  
The Filer lets you group entries by subject. For example,  
all entries relating to a particular project could be placed  
into a single Filer folder, making it easy to open one or  
more of the entries when necessary. You can group  
entries regardless of the applications they were created  
in, and entries can belong to more than one folder.  
By topic  
Before you can access entries using the Filer, you must  
first assign them to folders. See p. 198 for a full  
explanation of the Filer.  
You can use the various Calendar views to quickly and  
By date  
easily find information related to a time and/or date.  
1. Press [CALENDAR).  
The monthly calendar will appear.  
4
5
6
7
9
11:  
14' 15  
16' 17 18 19 20 21 22  
3
-
FE5  
-
74  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2. Select a day by touching it, then touch  
or  
to see  
view.  
Daily view  
3. In the Daily view touch an entry to select it and touch  
to display the details of the entry.  
For more information about using the Calendar  
application, see p. 86.  
Deleting Entries from the Unit  
Entries in the unit can be deleted using either the  
keyboard or the application menu.  
1. Open the desired application.  
Deleting  
single  
2. Select the entry in the Index mode or display it in the  
View mode.  
entries  
3. Press  
on the keyboard.  
A warning message appears asking if you are sure you  
want to delete the entry.  
75  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4. Touch  
Press  
(or  
or  
to cancel the deletion).  
respectively.  
Deleting  
entries using The DATA DELETION submenu-a secondary menu  
You can also make deletions using the application menu.  
the  
opened from the main application menu-gives you a  
tion menu  
great deal of flexibility in doing this.  
Open the desired application.  
2. Select the entry in the Index mode or display it in the  
View mode.  
3. Press  
and then touch  
to open the  
MODIFY menu.  
4. Touch DATA DELETION.  
The submenu appears.  
Deletes text selected by highlighting  
(see p. 71) .  
Deletes a selected entry (explained  
below).  
Deletes a filtered entry (see p. 215).  
Deletes all entries in TEL  
or TEL 3 (see p. 129).  
Deletes all entries in all TEL files.  
DATA DELETION submenu in the Tel application  
76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Touch SELECTED ENTRY.  
5.  
A warning message appears asking if you are sure you  
want to delete the entry.  
Touch  
Press  
(or  
to cancel the deletion).  
6.  
or (NJ , respectively.  
Drawing Using the Scrapbook  
One of the unit’s most powerful, fun, and innovative  
features is the Scrapbook application. The Scrapbook  
gives you the ability to enter drawings as well as  
handwritten letters and numbers directly on the display. (It  
is recommended that you use only the touch pen when  
drawing or writing on the display.)  
The Scrapbook application always opens to a “blank  
page.”  
1. Press [ SCRAPBOOK) to open the application.  
Using the  
drawing  
Please begi n dr awi ng  
t o view ot her pages .  
page. . .  
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
.
2. You can immediately begin drawing using default set of  
drawing tools or you can select a different set of tools.  
(To change the tools, press (NEW) and then follow STEP  
3. Press (MENU) and touch  
The MODIFY menu appears.  
77  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
drawing  
thin, thick, or “brush”  
a thin or thick eraser.  
Selects a black, gray, or white line  
pattern (white is equivalent to an  
eraser).  
* USE PEN  
Sets drawn lines to  
it (ruler on)  
USE ERASER  
or freestyle (ruler off).  
USE AREA TOOLS [A]  
DELETION  
L
Default drawing setting.  
L-Converts the touch pen to an eraser.  
Marks areas to cut, copy, paste or  
delete.  
indicates that there is a  
submenu for the menu  
items.  
Deletes a selected area, single entry,  
or all Scrapbook entries.  
After storing an entry, or pressing  
or  
to  
recall a stored entry to the blank page, the display  
changes to a “viewing page.” Existing graphic entries are  
viewed on this page.  
Making  
new  
graphic  
1. Press (SCRAPBOOK] to open the application.  
A “blank page” appears on the display.  
2. Start drawing anywhere in the drawing area with the  
touch pen.  
entries  
3. Write the letter A and draw a circle around it.  
4. Press  
.
The drawing is now stored.  
If you make a mistake while drawing, you can clear it any  
time before it is stored by pressing  
.
78  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
.
.
.
.
.
.
l
,
.
.
79  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
.
:
.
:
.
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
0
l
viewing  
:
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Checking the Time and Date  
1. To check the current date and time, press and hold  
.
2. Release the key to close the Clock application.  
For a full explanation of the Clock application, see page  
182.  
Checking the Unit’s Memory  
The unit has a certain memory capacity in which  
operations are carried out and data that has been  
entered, such as phone numbers and memos, is stored.  
When the amount of data already stored approaches the  
unit’s maximum memory capacity, you may not be able to  
store an entry or the data being processed may be lost  
when you change applications. To avoid these problems,  
you should check the remaining memory space regularly  
and free up space when necessary by deleting previous  
entries.  
The Check Memory function makes it possible to easily  
check the amount of free memory available in the unit, as  
well as in a RAM card (if one is installed), avoiding the  
inconvenience of seeing an out-of-memory message.  
81  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1. Press  
and then touch  
to open the  
TOOLS menu.  
2. Select CHECK MEMORY.  
Percentage of  
memory used.  
0%  
TELEPHONE  
TELEPHONE  
TELEPHONE  
1
:
11 SCHEOULE  
0
.
Number of entries  
stored for each  
application.  
2
:
:
0
1
ANN2  
3
:
4
USER FI LE 1  
TO DO  
USER FI LE  
USER FI LE  
2
3
:
:
0
0
NOTEBOOK :  
SCRAPBOOK  
0
4
OUTLI NE  
:
If a RAM card is installed, you can touch  
check the memory available on it.  
to  
3. Touch  
Even if the display shows a small amount of free memory  
available, the free memory may be too small for certain  
features to function.  
The Tools Menu-the Unit’s Basic Utilities  
Many of the unit’s basic utilities are accessed through the  
TOOLS menu. The menu is also used to set up and  
configure certain features such as the display and the  
key. An illustration and summary of the TOOLS  
menu (including page references where full explanations  
can be found) are provided below.  
82  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Shows the amount of free and  
used memory (see p. 81).  
q
Adjusts the contrast of the LCD  
display and calibrates the touch  
panel (see p. 52).  
LCD  
Sets the built-in clock (see p. 182).  
Configures the start-up display  
(see p. 280).  
SET START-UP DISPLAY  
Locks and unlocks entries  
protected by the Secret function  
(see p. 283 to p. 285).  
DELETE  
SET DAILY ALARMS  
MORE  
Changes and deletes passwords  
(see p. 286).  
Sets and turns off up to 7 alarms  
to sound daily (see p. 189).  
Open the second TOOLS menu.  
First TOOLS menu  
Touch MORE TOOLS to open the second TOOLS menu.  
Turns the alarm sound for set  
alarms on and off (see p. 189).  
Turns the key beep on and off  
(see p.  
ENABLE/DISABLE ALARM  
KEY SOUND  
Use to assign words to the  
key (see p.  
SET UP  
KEY  
Deletes all entries marked as  
secret (see p. 287).  
I
DELETE ALL SECRET DATA  
Goes back to the first TOOLS  
menu.  
Second TOOLS menu  
83  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
84  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The unit’s Calendar, Schedule, To Do, and  
Ann (Anniversary) applications let you  
easily structure and manage your time,  
whether scheduling appointments or  
providing reminders about important people  
and events. The explanations and examples  
in this chapter will give you the information  
you need to make all of the time  
management features of these applications  
work for you on a daily basis.  
85  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The Calendar Application  
The Calendar serves as the unit’s “central exchange.” It’s  
a calendar that you can reference at any time for the  
correct date, and it’s also a management assistant,  
indicating important dates so that you can better manage  
your time and appointments. The application plays three  
major roles on the unit:  
l
l
l
It is a reliable calendar that can show you any month  
from January 1901 to December 2099.  
It indicates entries made in other applications, including  
Ann, Schedule, and To Do.  
In the Daily view, it serves as a way of accessing  
entries made in the Ann, Schedule, and To Do  
applications.  
Selecting a  
calendar  
view  
The Calendar application is used to display and indirectly  
access information. You cannot make entries in the  
Calendar, so it does not have Index, View, and Edit  
modes. What the application does offer you is five views:  
Daily, Weekly, Weekly Graph, Monthly, and a  
Three-month view. Monthly is the default view and it  
appears each time the application is selected (except  
when selected from the  
application).  
The views are linked, which means that you can switch  
from one to another and the selected date will not  
change.  
To change the view, touch the desired date then the  
appropriate button for the required Calendar view.  
You can also use the menu to select a Calendar view  
directly from any other view.  
l
Press  
and then touch  
to open the  
VIEWS menu.  
l
Select the desired view in the submenu.  
You can change the Calendar application’s initial display.  
See p. 288.  
86  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The Monthly view is the Calendar application’s default  
The Monthly  
view  
view, and appears every time  
open the application.  
is pressed to  
Change to other views.  
Selects and displays today’s date.  
r
r
1
number of days  
in the year that have  
passed, the number  
remaining, and in  
which week the day  
fails.  
Monthly tabs  
l
l
The flashing date indicates the currently selected date.  
There is an Ann entry on the highlighted day (see p.  
119).  
l
l
! indicates that the day is a due date for a To Do entry  
(see p. 104).  
An upper dot indicates a Schedule entry in the  
morning, and a lower dot indicates one in the afternoon  
or evening (see p. 93).  
To display another month, touch the monthly tab for the  
desired month. Touching  
or  
displays the  
following or previous six months, respectively.  
You can also step through the months sequentially using  
a n d  
.
The Three-month view gives you an overview of a  
selected month and the month preceding and following it.  
To open the Three-month view, touch 3 MONTH  
CALENDAR in the VIEWS menu.  
The  
month view  
87  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Displays current  
month if not already  
displayed.  
L
Changes to the  
Monthly view.  
Selected month  
Press  
or  
to see the previous or next set  
of three months, respectively.  
You can display a Monthly view by touching the selected  
month.  
The Weekly  
view  
The Weekly view shows the schedule over a one-week  
period. To open the Weekly view, select a date in the  
Daily or Monthly view and touch  
Selects and displays  
today’s date.  
Change to other  
views.  
r
r
r
Temporarily hides (or  
reveals) all Schedule  
and Ann entries from  
the view (see p. 108).  
Selected date  
Press  
or  
to display the preceding or  
following weeks, respectively.  
You can also go to a Daily view by touching the required  
date twice.  
The Weekly  
Graph view  
The Weekly Graph view shows Schedule entries over a  
one-week period, helping you avoid conflicting  
appointments and letting you check your free time at a  
88  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
glance. The view must be selected from the application  
menu.  
Temporarily removes all Schedule  
and Ann entries from the Weekly and  
Daily views, (see  
108).  
Change to other views.  
I
Selected date  
l
l
Schedule entries are shown in five-minute blocks.  
Shaded portions indicate times of the day when you  
have appointments or other commitments. Portions that  
are blackened indicate that you have more than one  
appointment during that period.  
l
To see the morning or evening schedule, press  
I,), respectively.  
or  
Press  
or  
to display the preceding or  
following weeks, respectively.  
You can go to a Daily view by touching the required day  
twice.  
The Daily  
view  
The Daily view is convenient for viewing all entries for a  
single day. It can be accessed from the  
Weekly view by selecting a day and touching  
89  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Temporarily removes all Schedule  
and Ann entries from the Weekly and  
Daily views (see p. 108).  
Change to the Weekly view.  
Selected entry  
The number of  
entries for the  
current day.  
Mee t . i . n. g. . . a. t.  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
... Ch. a. r ..t . f.. o.r  
Time bar graph for  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.. . F.r. ank. . .a. b. .o. ut. . . Sal. .e. s -. .  
.
.
.
..  
.
.
.
.
.
"
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Schedule entries.  
.
.
.
.
..  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
..  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
...  
"
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. q . . TI I  
up . Theat er . .Ti .cket  
Shaded portions on the bar graph indicate times of the  
day when you have appointments or other commitments.  
Portions that are blackened indicate that you have more  
than one appointment during that period.  
Press  
to display the morning bar graph and  
to  
display the evening bar graph.  
and  
to display the  
to step  
Touch an entry to select it, or  
through the entries, then  
entry in the View mode of the application that was used  
to create it.  
Touch the entry twice.  
You can also step through days one by one using  
and  
If the amount of available memory is small, To Do entries  
may not be properly displayed in the Daily view. In this  
case, a message will appear indicating this when the  
Daily view is selected. To properly display all To Do  
entries, delete any unnecessary data, then reselect Daily  
view.  
90  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Entries in the Schedule, To Do, and Ann applications  
Finding  
entries using can be recalled from the Calendar’s Daily view.  
the Calendar  
In the Calendar application,  
views  
1. Go to the Daily view.  
Schedule entries  
wi t h Smi t h  
2. Select the entry you want to see in full.  
3. Touch  
The selected entry is displayed in detail in the View mode.  
You can also touch the entry twice in the Daily view to go  
directly to the application’s View mode.  
l
An overdue entry in the To Do application (an entry for  
which the due date has passed) will always be shown  
on the display for today’s date in Calendar views.  
l
Monthly goals in the To Do application can only be  
accessed via the Monthly view.  
Selecting  
a date  
From any view, you can scroll to the previous or next time  
period (whether the next month, week, or day) by  
pressing  
or  
, then touch a particular date,  
or move the cursor to it, to select it for display in another  
Calendar view. However, another convenient way of  
selecting a date that is not on the display is using GO TO  
A SPECIFIC DATE in the Calendar application menu.  
1. Press  
touch  
in any Calendar view,  
and select GO TO A SPECIFIC DATE.  
A date entry window appears.  
91  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GO TO A  
SPECI FI C DATE  
selected  
d
a
t
y
e
2. Enter the date you want to select in the order of month,  
day, and year. Prefix single-digit months and days with a  
0.  
3. Touch  
.
The selected date will appear in the current Calendar  
view.  
You can calculate a date some time in the future or the  
past using the  
application. See p. 174.  
The  
Calendar  
application  
menus  
Selects the Three-month view  
(see p. 87).  
Selects the Monthly view  
(see p. 87).  
1
Selects the Weekly Graph  
(see p. 88).  
Goes directly to a particular  
date (see p. 91).  
GO TO A SPECIFIC  
Configures the default display  
to Weekly or Monthly view  
(see p. 289).  
Sets up the date format  
M/D/Y or D.M.Y. (see p. 288).  
up the Monthly and  
Three-month view format  
Monday-Sunday or  
Sunday-Saturday (see p.  
288).  
SET UP MONTHLY FORMAT  
Schedule entries can be  
deleted through the Calendar  
(see p. 97).  
DELETI ON  
92  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The Schedule Application  
The Schedule application allows you to enter  
appointments, times and dates for meetings, parties and  
events, and set an alarm to sound prior to or at the time  
of a scheduled entry. This makes it easy to organize  
your entire day and always arrive at appointments on  
time. Schedule entries are indicated on the Calendar’s  
Monthly view with a small black dot next to the date of an  
entry, providing an overview of your schedule.  
A
Schedule entry has three fields-for the date, time,  
Making new  
entries  
and a description of the event.  
There are three basic steps to making a new entry in the  
Schedule application: selecting the date, entering the  
starting and ending time, and entering a description for  
the entry. (Entering a starting and ending time is optional,  
but you must enter a description.) The date for a new  
Schedule entry can easily be selected in the Calendar  
application.  
Enter the following information:  
March 15, 1994  
Date  
Time  
p.m. 12:OO a.m.  
of March Costume Ball  
Description  
Press ( CALENDAR) .  
2. Display and select the desired date.  
3. Press [ NEW) .  
The Edit mode opens in the Schedule application.  
93  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
g r a p h  
DATE:  
. . .  
------  
.
.
. . . . . . . .  
.
. . . . . . . . ...”  
4. Enter the party’s starting time from the keyboard. Type 08  
30 and press  
You can also enter the starting time using the bar graph,  
Touch to display the evening bar graph and  
.
then touch beneath  
with the touch pen.  
DATE: M/ D/ Y=  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
:
TIME:  
:
.I..... . . . . . . . . . -- .  
. . . . . . . . . . . .  
I...  
5. Enter the ending time. Type 12 00 and press (AM].  
You can also enter the ending time using the bar graph.  
Touch the end of the bar graph.  
6. Move to the DESCRIPTION field.  
7. Type Ides of March Costume Ball.  
8. Touch (STORE].  
The new entry is now stored.  
Indicates the starting  
time of the entry  
currently displayed.  
DATE: MAR 15 1994  
.
T I M E :  
.
.
Ides of Mar ch Cos t ume Ball  
94  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Press (NEW) if you want to make another entry on the  
same day.  
You can also select a date for the new entry using the  
application menu. See p. 99.  
Finding  
entries  
Using the Index mode  
1. Go to the Index mode.  
Description  
J A N  
r
...................  
.............  
.
.............................................................................  
JAN 13....1...9....9. 4.1......  
to  
........  
.........................................  
........................  
..............  
JAN. . 13.  
Pr .od.u.....c....t. .s. .  
...  
.
j
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. .9:  
. . Sa. .1. es Mee  
JAN 14 .1994  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.....  
...................  
JAN 1.6 19941  
to....  
.....................  
.
.
...  
................  
......  
..........................  
........................  
......  
............ ....... ..................  
............ ....  
.
Starting time  
The entries you have made are listed in chronological  
order. If you do not see the entry you want to view, press  
or  
to scroll through the entries until you  
find it.  
2. Select an entry.  
3. Touch  
The full entry is shown in the View mode.  
In step 2, touching an entry twice will also display it  
directly in the View mode.  
In the View mode, press  
and  
to display  
entries sequentially. This will also display the days that  
have no entries (as blank pages).  
95  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
he date. See  
the Daily view  
You can also jump to entries by specifying  
p. 99.  
Using the Calendar view  
You can access the Schedule entries from  
of the Calendar application by touching the desired entry  
twice. (See p. 89 for details.)  
Using keywords  
Even though you cannot remember the date of an event  
or appointment, if you know the contents and/or a word  
that appears in the DESCRIPTION field of the entry, you  
can access the entry in the following manner.  
1. Press  
The SEARCH window appears.  
2. Type in any word that should appear in the  
DESCRIPTION field of the entry you are looking for.  
3. Touch  
If you still do not see the desired entry, press  
display the following matching entries.  
to  
4. Touch  
when you find the entry you want.  
This function does not distinguish between upper- and  
lower-case letters.  
Moving  
You can easily keep track of schedule changes, including  
the date and time, by editing entries, without reentering  
all the information from the beginning.  
If the time and/or date of a Schedule entry is changed,  
the entry is automatically resorted.  
ments and  
editing  
entries  
1. Select the entry you want to change in the Index mode or  
display it in the View mode.  
2. Press  
3. Move to the field you want to change.  
4. Make the desired changes.  
96  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5. Touch  
The new, edited entry is now stored.  
You can also use cut and paste to move appointments.  
You can delete single entries or groups of entries.  
Deleting  
entries  
For a full explanation of deleting filtered entries, see p.  
215.  
Deleting single entries  
1. In the Schedule application, select the entry you want to  
delete in the Index mode or display it in the View mode.  
Or in the Calendar application, select the entry you want  
to delete in the Daily view.  
2. Press  
touch  
and select DATA  
DELETION.  
A submenu opens.  
3. Select SELECTED ENTRY.  
A warning message will appear asking if you are sure you  
want to delete the entry.  
4. Touch  
(or  
to cancel the deletion).  
You can also delete an entry by pressing  
selecting or displaying it.  
after  
97  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Deleting all entries  
All Schedule entries can be deleted at one time using the  
application menu.  
Press  
and then touch  
in the Index or  
1.  
View mode.  
2. Select DATA DELETION.  
A submenu appears.  
Select ALL SCHEDULE DATA.  
3.  
4.  
A warning message will appear asking if you are sure you  
want to delete all the entries in the application.  
Touch  
(or  
to cancel the deletion).  
It is not possible to delete all entries simultaneously if the  
unit is locked. See p. 282.  
Deletion of entries over a specific period  
You can delete all Schedule entries for a period of a  
month, a week, or a single day through the Calendar  
application.  
1.  
2.  
Press  
and select the date which falls in the  
period you want to delete all Schedule entries in.  
Press  
touch  
and select DATA  
DELETION.  
A submenu appears.  
[SELECTED MONTH  
98  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3. Select the desired period for deletion.  
A warning message appears asking if you are sure you  
want to delete all the entries for the selected period.  
4. Touch  
(or  
to cancel the deletion).  
You can also delete Schedule entries for the selected  
date in any Calendar view with  
.
l
Deletion of entries over a specific period cannot be  
done if the unit is locked (see 282).  
l
To delete all Schedule entries over a specific period,  
you must be in a Calendar view which includes the  
entire period you want to delete. For example, you  
cannot delete entries for an entire week while in the  
Daily view.  
l
The unit  
each Monday-to-Sunday interval as  
one week. If you select a week for deletion, entries  
over this period will be deleted even if a Monthly view is  
displayed with a Sunday-to-Saturday format.  
If you  
jump to a specific date to find entries or  
Selecting a  
specific date make a new entry, it can be selected easily using the  
application menu.  
In the Index or View mode of the Schedule application,  
press  
touch  
, and select GO TO A  
SPECIFIC DATE.  
A date entry window appears.  
GO TO A  
SPECIFIC DATE  
2. Enter the date you want to go to.  
3. Touch  
.
The first entry on that day is selected in the Index mode,  
or displayed in the View mode.  
99  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
If you would like to make a new entry, press [NEW) , or if  
you would like to view other entries on that date, press  
o
r
Using the Schedule application’s Repeat function, you  
can copy entries to other days or dates without having to  
type in each one individually. This is convenient for those  
appointments, meetings, and other events that are held  
regularly. The Repeat function can also be used to enter  
an event that spans a period of a few days or a few  
weeks, such as a business trip or vacation. Six different  
types of repeating events include:  
Making  
entries for  
recurring and  
extended  
events  
l
Daily  
Repeats a day-for events that  
span consecutive days.  
Repeats the same day each  
week-for regular weekly events.  
Repeats the same day of each  
month (for example, the first  
Tuesday)-for regular monthly  
events on a specific day.  
l
l
Weekly  
Monthly by day  
l
Monthly by date  
Repeats the same date each  
month (for example, the  
regular monthly events on a  
specific date.  
Repeats a day every other week.  
The same as Daily repeat, but  
excludes weekends.  
l
l
Bi-weekly  
Work day  
You have a five-day vacation beginning on June 24th.  
1.  
Select the date that the entry will occur for the first time in  
the Schedule or in the Calendar application.  
2. Press  
3.  
4.  
5.  
6.  
Move to the DESCRIPTION field.  
Enter the description. Type Vacation.  
Touch  
Press  
touch  
and select REPEAT  
THIS ENTRY.  
100  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
REPEAT THI S  
DATE J UN  
WEEKLY is the default  
repeat setting.  
7. Touch  
8. Enter the number of additional days on which the event  
will repeat. An entry can be repeated up to 999 times. In  
this case, type 4.  
REPEAT THI S ENTRY  
DAT E  
9. Touch  
Your five-day vacation is now stored.  
You can confirm that your vacation has been entered by  
looking at the Calendar view.  
101  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
l
l
To repeat an entry that has already been stored, select  
it in the Index mode or display it in the View mode, then  
proceed from step 6 above.  
Events like “the second and fourth Thursday of each  
month” can be generated by making two different  
schedule entries and repeating each one.  
Setting  
a Schedule  
alarm  
A Schedule alarm can be set to remind you of scheduled  
events such as appointments and meetings. You can set  
an alarm for any entry that has a starting time set. Set  
alarms will sound even if the unit is turned off. After  
setting the alarm for a scheduled event, will appear  
next to the event in the Index mode and in the  
Calendar’s Daily view.  
Enter the following information with an alarm set for one  
hour in advance:  
Date  
Time  
Description  
March 16, 1994  
I :OO-2:00 pm  
Lunch with Jo  
1. In the Calendar or Schedule application, select the date  
and press  
.
2. Enter the starting time and ending time, each followed by  
PM .  
0
The cursor moves to the alarm time field.  
3. Enter the desired alarm. Type  
1200  
4. Touch  
Press  
.
[ALARM).  
appears.  
DATE:  
.
.
TIME:  
2:  
102  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5. Move to the DESCRIPTION field and type Lunch with Jo.  
6. Touch  
appears at the top of the display indicating that any set  
alarms will sound when their respective times are  
reached.  
l
If you want to set the alarm at the schedule’s starting  
time, skip step 3 above.  
l
To set an alarm for an entry that has already been  
stored, display the entry in the View mode and press  
This will set the alarm at the entry’s  
starting time. If you want to set a different alarm time,  
you must display the entry in the Edit mode.  
You can also set alarms separately from Schedule  
entries. See p. 188.  
Clearing a set alarm  
To clear an alarm that has been set for an entry, display  
in the View mode and press  
or  
when the entry is displayed in the Edit  
mode.  
You can disable all set alarms at once. See p. 189.  
Selects the Monthly view  
calendar (see p. 87).  
The  
Schedule  
application  
menus  
Selects the Weekly Graph view  
(see p. 88).  
Goes directly to a particular date  
(see p. 91).  
Turns the  
function on or  
off (see p. 214 and p. 215).  
Use to enter events that occur  
regularly, or mark an event that  
spans a period of time (see p.  
100).  
Sets the entry as secret or non  
secret. The default setting is non  
secret (see p. 284).  
1
Selects specific text, entries, or all  
data for deletion (see  
p. 97 and p. 98).  
103  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The To Do Application  
The To Do application is a valuable organizational tool to  
help meet deadlines and to add structure and efficiency  
to your work and the goals that you set for yourself. This  
application allows you to organize and track tasks and  
objectives, to assign them a level of priority, and to assign  
up to five categories to each entry, making it possible to  
access them in a variety of ways. To help you in this  
effort, entries are automatically  
by the unit as  
TO BE DONE, DONE ENTRIES, or MONTHLY GOALS.  
Entries in the To Do application contain eight fields:  
Description, Due Date, Priority, and five fields for  
categories. These categories, which you can define and  
assign, can be used to manage tasks by project, the  
personnel involved in them, etc.  
Making new  
entries  
The way in which To Do entries are displayed in the  
Calendar views will differ depending on the contents of  
the Due Date field, as follows:  
l
Entries with no due date are always shown on the  
display for today’s date.  
Entries with a full due date (month, day, and year) are  
shown only on that date.  
l
Entries for which only a month and year (no day) have  
been entered appear in the monthly goals box in the  
Monthly view.  
This system provides the flexibility for an entry to be  
displayed according to the type of task. For example, you  
could enter a daily task, leaving the DUE DATE field  
blank, and it would be displayed every day in that day’s  
schedule; or for a long-term project, enter the month in  
the DUE DATE field without a specific date and it will be  
shown only in the Monthly view.  
104  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Assigning priority to entries  
In the PRIORITY field you can enter a number (O-9) or  
letter (A-Z) (but not special or accented characters),  
which then act to indicate the importance of a task or  
project. (Numbers are given priority over letters.)  
Enter the following information:  
Prepare Alpha project proposal for John  
Description  
Priority  
1. Press (TO).  
2. Press  
.
The Edit mode opens.  
. i. i . / O/ Y=  
OUE OATE .  
__  
__  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
PRI ORI TY .  
__  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
__  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
CATEGORY 1  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
__  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
CATEGORY 2  
CATEGORY 3  
CATEGORY 4  
CATEGORY 5  
3. Enter the description of the entry. Type Prepare Alpha  
project proposal for John.  
4. Skip the DUE DATE field and move to the PRIORITY field.  
5. Type  
Al pha  
6. Touch  
The entry is now stored.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Assigning due dates to entries  
Enter the following information:  
Sales report  
Description  
Due Date  
Mar  
1994  
In the To Do application,  
1. Press (NEW) .  
2. Type Sales repot?.  
3. Move to the DUE DATE field. Enter the due date in the  
order of month, day, year. Type 03 1994,  
4. Touch  
Entering a monthly goal  
If you enter only the month and year in an entry’s DUE  
DATE field (with no specific date), the entry becomes a  
“monthly goal,” and will be displayed in the Monthly view  
of the Calendar.  
You have a manuscript you have to read by the end of  
August.  
In the To Do application,  
1. Press  
.
2. Enter a description. Type Read manuscript.  
3. Move to the DUE DATE field.  
4. Enter the month when you want to accomplish this. Type  
08.  
5. Press I,) twice (skipping the date) and enter the year.  
Type 1994.  
6. Touch  
The entry is now stored.  
Now check that the entry you made is displayed on the  
Calendar.  
7. Press  
106  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
15  
19  
16  
17  
18  
20  
21 22  
28 29  
24  
23  
30 31  
Touch the description in the dotted  
border box to  
access the Index mode for monthly goal entries.  
Finding and  
entries  
Using the Index mode  
1. Go to the Index mode.  
Priority  
Selects a  
an entry  
with no assigned  
priority.  
The Index mode in the To Do application can show  
entries based either on their priority level or their due  
date. In the default setting, entries with an assigned  
priority are displayed first (in the order of number, letter),  
followed by entries with no assigned priority. Touch  
in the Index mode to display entries in  
chronological order based on the due date. To return to a  
display based on priority, touch  
. This means  
you can access entries in the way that is most convenient  
for you.  
2. Press  
, touch  
, and select the file you  
want to review.  
3. If you want to see the details of an entry, select the entry  
and touch  
.
107  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Touch the entry twice.  
The entry is displayed in the View mode.  
Using the Calendar views  
To Do entries are indicated with an ! beside their due  
dates in the Monthly view of the Calendar application.  
In the Daily and Weekly views, you can get a clear  
overview of the To Do entries by temporarily eliminating  
all Ann and Schedule entries from the current view.  
Press  
2. Go to the Daily view.  
3. Touch  
All Ann and Schedule entries are hidden from view.  
Indicates an overdue  
entry.  
4
I TEMS  
THURSDAY J AN 13,  
Indicates priority of an  
entry with no due date.  
. .f. . o. r.  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Sa l. e s. -  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Indicates priority of an  
entry with a due date  
assigned (displayed on  
its due date).  
If you want see the details of an entry, select the entry  
and touch  
Touch the entry twice.  
The entry is displayed in the To Do View mode.  
l
l
l
Once the Ann and Schedule entries are hidden, this  
setting will remain in effect and they will not be  
displayed in either the Weekly or Daily views.  
To return hidden Ann and Schedule entries to the  
display, touch  
again in the Weekly or Daily  
view.  
An overdue entry (an entry for which the due date has  
passed) will always be shown on the display for today’s  
date in addition to its due date in the Calendar views.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using keywords  
the contents of any fields, including the DUE DATE  
and PRIORITY fields, you can access desired entries  
directly.  
a
In the To Do application,  
1.  
2.  
Press  
.
The SEARCH window appears.  
Type in any word you remember in the entry you are  
looking for. This word may appear in any field of the  
entry.  
Touch  
3.  
If you still do not see the desired entry, touch  
display the following matching entries.  
Touch  
when you find the entry you want.  
This function does not distinguish between upper- and  
lower-case letters.  
Select the entry you want to change in the Index mode or  
display it in the View mode.  
Editing  
entries  
1.  
2. Press [EDIT).  
The Edit mode opens with the selected entry.  
Make the desired changes.  
Touch  
3.  
4.  
The new, edited entry is now stored, and resorted based  
on the new data.  
Checking off Once you have reached a target or goal you set for  
yourself, it is a good idea to check off the entry as  
completed so that you can always focus on things to be  
done. An entry marked done will be resorted into the  
DONE ENTRIES file and remain displayed on the “done  
date” in the Calendar views. This allows you to go back  
and review entries that have been completed.  
completed  
entries  
This operation can be done either using the Calendar,  
109  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
which makes it easy to check completed entries when  
you check your schedule for the day, or in the To Do  
application, which lets you check off a Monthly goal entry  
or a task that you have completed before its due date.  
Checking off entries using the Caiendar  
Press  
2. Go to the Daily view.  
3. Display the date you want to check, or touch  
you want to check today’s schedule.  
if  
If the entry you want to check off is not displayed, press  
until it appears.  
THURSDAY  
MAR  
2
I TEMS  
.
.
,
-r-----Check box  
.
.
.
.
.
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
I
. .  
I
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
_.  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
I
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
”
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
I
Touch the check box next to the entry you have  
completed.  
Select the completed entry and  
row of the keyboard.  
press  
on the bottom  
THURSDAY MAR  
2
I TEMS  
,
The box is marked with The entry is now marked as  
completed, and it is marked as having been completed  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
today. The entry is now resorted into the DONE ENTRIES  
file.  
If you mistakenly check off an entry as completed, you  
can uncheck the entry by touching the check box or  
pressing  
again. However, if you do this, the entry  
will be stored without a due date.  
Checking off entries in the To Do application  
1. Select the entry in the Index mode or display it in the  
View mode.  
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. . . . . . . .  
t
2. Touch the check box.  
Press  
The entry is checked off and the box is marked with  
The DUE DATE field changes to the DONE DATE field  
and today’s date appears in it.  
CATEGORY 5  
The entry is now restored into the DONE ENTRIES file.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
If you mistakenly check off an entry as completed, you  
can uncheck the entry by touching the check box or  
pressing  
again. However, if you do this, the entry  
will be stored without a due date.  
Once a project or task is completed, and you no longer  
need the To Do reminder, you can delete the entry, or  
groups of entries, which will free up memory in the unit.  
See p. 117.  
Using  
categories  
A category is a field that can contain keywords of up to  
12 characters that you specify. You can use categories to  
facilitate information management, for example, to group  
tasks by project, personnel, or other criteria that are  
important to you. A total of up to 32 categories can be  
used in the  
Do application, and up to five categories  
can be assigned to each entry.  
Once a word is entered in the category field of an entry,  
that word is automatically registered and sorted  
alphabetically in the category list, in which you can select  
a category to assign to an entry. You can also manually  
add a word directly to the category list, as well as editing  
and deleting words in the list.  
Be careful when manually adding categories the unit  
upper and lower case letters differently. In  
other words “For John” and “for john” are considered 2  
different categories by the unit.  
Making entries using categories  
Enter the following:  
Description  
Due Date  
Category 1  
Category  
Call Frank about Alpha Project  
Mar 15, 1994  
Phone Call  
Alpha Pro.  
1. Press  
2. Enter the description and due date. Type Call Frank  
about Alpha Project 03 15 1994.  
3. Move to the CATEGORY 1 field.  
.
112  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4. Enter the category. Type Phone Call.  
5. Move to CATEGORY 2. Type Alpha Pro.  
DESCRIPTION  
Fr a nk  
Pr oj e c t  
.
.
.
.
.
DUE DATE  
.
.
.
P_R_I_ ORI TY  
.
.
__  
.
.
__ ___  
.
.
.
.
CATEGORY 1  
Ca l l  
CATEGORY 4  
6. Touch  
The entry is stored and, at the same time, the two  
categories you entered are registered in the category list.  
7. Press  
touch  
and select VIEW BY  
CATEGORY to check the list.  
VI EW SCREEN  
CATEGORIES  
. . P.h. o.n. e. . . Ca. l. . l.  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
You cannot use the same category more than once in the  
same entry.  
Assigning categories using the category list  
1. When entering or editing an entry in the Edit mode, move  
to any of the five CATEGORY fields.  
2. Touch CATEGORIES .  
The Category window opens with the first category  
selected. Categories are listed in alphabetical order.  
113  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CATEGORI ES  
3. Select the desired category and touch  
Touch the desired category twice.  
.
The category window closes and the selected category is  
entered in the entry.  
4. Touch  
You can also open the CATEGORIES window using the  
menu. In step 2, press  
touch  
and  
select CATEGORIES.  
You cannot use the same category more than once in the  
same entry.  
Reviewing the To Do list by category  
You can check only the entries that have been assigned  
a specific category.  
1. Press  
and then touch  
.
2. Select VIEW BY CATEGORY.  
A box opens showing the first 8 categories.  
Touch  
or  
to see the preceding or  
following 8 categories, respectively.  
114  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3. Select the category that you want to check by touching it  
twice.  
All entries that have been assigned the selected category  
are shown in the Index mode. You can return to the view  
screen by touching the category tab once.  
Adding categories to the category list  
You can add a category directly to the category list at any  
time in the To Do application. You can have up to 32  
categories.  
1. Press (MENU), touch  
and select  
CATEGORIES.  
If  
are in the Edit mode, touch [CATEGORIES .  
The CATEGORIES window opens.  
2. Touch  
Press  
A NEW CATEGORY window opens.  
3. Enter a category name up to 12 characters long.  
4. Touch  
The new category is added to the list, and all categories  
are resorted.  
Editing categories  
If you want to edit a category name, you are  
115  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
recommended to use the category list so the changes will  
be reflected in all entries that category is assigned to.  
You can edit a category at any time in the To Do  
application.  
1. Press (MENU), touch  
and select  
CATEGORIES.  
2. Select the category you want to edit.  
3. Press [EDIT).  
If the category is currently being used in an entry, a  
message asks if you want to edit it anyway. Touch  
to proceed.  
An EDIT CATEGORY window opens.  
4. Make any desired changes.  
5. Touch  
The new, edited category is now stored in the list, and the  
changes are reflected in all entries the category is  
assigned to.  
If you edit a category in an entry, it is registered in the  
category list as a new category.  
Deleting categories  
When you find a category that is not needed any more,  
after project completion for example, you may want to  
delete the category from the category list.  
A category cannot be deleted if it is being used by an  
entry.  
1. Press  
, touch (MODIFY], and select  
CATEGORIES.  
2. Select the category you want to delete.  
3. Press  
A warning message will appear asking if you are sure you  
want to delete the category.  
4. Touch  
(or  
to cancel the deletion).  
116  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Deleting single entries  
Deleting  
entries  
1. Select the desired entry in the Index mode or display it in  
the View mode.  
Press  
DELETION.  
, touch  
and select DATA  
2.  
3.  
4.  
A submenu opens.  
Select SELECTED ENTRY.  
A warning message will appear asking if you are sure you  
want to delete the entry.  
Touch  
(or  
to cancel the deletion).  
You can also delete single entries by pressing  
step 2 above.  
in  
Deleting all entries in the current view  
You can delete all the entries in the TO BE DONE, DONE  
ENTRIES, or MONTHLY GOALS file, or all entries  
assigned a specific category, using the application’s  
MODIFY menu. This is especially convenient for deleting  
all of those entries that have been checked off as  
completed.  
1. Press  
touch  
, and select the file  
containing the entries you want to delete.  
2. Press  
touch  
and select DATA  
DELETION.  
.
SELECTED ENTRY  
IN CURRENT VIEW  
ALL DO ENTRIES  
3. Select ALL IN CURRENT VIEW.  
117  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
A warning message will appear asking if you are sure you  
want to delete all the entries in the selected file.  
Touch  
(or  
to cancel the deletion).  
It is not possible to delete all entries in a file  
simultaneously if the unit is locked. See p. 282.  
Deleting all To Do entries  
You can delete all of the To Do entries in all files.  
1. Press  
DELETION.  
, touch  
, and select DATA  
2. Select ALL TO DO ENTRIES.  
A warning message will appear asking if you are sure you  
want to delete all To Do entries.  
3. Touch  
(or  
to cancel the deletion).  
It is not possible to delete all entries simultaneously if the  
unit is locked: See p. 282.  
The To Do  
application  
menus  
Selects the MONTHLY GOALS  
file.  
review.  
the entry as secret or non  
secret (see 284).  
Selects specific text or entries for  
deletion (see p. 117).  
Opens the CATEGORIES window  
so you can add, edit, delete, or  
select categories.  
I
118  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The Ann (Anniversary) Application  
The Ann (Anniversary) application makes it easy for you  
to keep track of annual events, such as wedding  
anniversaries and birthdays of friends, relatives and  
business associates. Once entered, the dates of annual  
events are displayed on the Calendar highlighted in white  
on black, making it possible to prepare for them well in  
advance every year.  
Making new  
entries  
There are two files in the Ann application. The first file,  
ANN 1, stores and displays entries that occur on a  
specific date every year, and the second, ANN 2, stores  
and displays entries that occur on a specific day, for  
example, the first Tuesday in November. ANN 1 is the  
default file.  
Making new entries in the ANN 1 file  
Enter the following in the ANN 1 file:  
May 17  
Birthday  
Date  
Description  
1. Press  
.
The Index mode opens in the ANN 1 file.  
2. Press  
.
The Edit mode opens.  
DESCRI PTI ON  
3. Enter the date in the order of month, day (there is no  
year entry). Type 05 17.  
119  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4. Move to the DESCRIPTION field.  
5. Enter the description of the event. Type Jo’s  
OATE  
Bi r t hda y4  
ESCRI PTI ON  
6. Touch  
The entry is now stored.  
Making new entries in the ANN 2 file  
Enter the following in the ANN 2 file:  
The second Sunday in May  
Mother’s Day  
Description  
In the Ann application,  
1. Press (MENU) and then touch  
.
2. Select ANN 2.  
The Index mode opens.  
3. Press  
.
The Edit mode opens.  
W=WEEK  
DAY  
DESCRI PTI ON  
4. Enter the month and day, using the appropriate number  
equivalents shown on the display. Type 05 2 0.  
120  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5. Move to the DESCRIPTION field.  
6. Enter the description. Type Mother’s Day.  
7. Touch  
In the Index mode, you can select a file simply by  
touching an index tab for the desired file.  
Entries are stored in chronological order in each file.  
Finding  
entries  
Using the Index mode  
Go to the Index mode.  
2. Select the file by touching the appropriate tab. If the  
desired entry is not displayed, press  
or  
.
3. Select the entry and then touch  
entry in full.  
to display the  
Touch the entry twice.  
Using the Calendar view  
In the Calendar’s Monthly view, Ann entries are indicated  
by dates highlighted in white on black, clearly showing  
that you have important annual events on those days.  
You can access the Ann entries from the Daily view in  
the Calendar application by touching the desired entry  
twice. (See p. 94 for details.)  
Using keywords  
If you cannot remember the exact date of an important  
anniversary, a friend’s birthday for example, follow the  
procedure below to access the entry and check the date.  
1. Press (SEARCH).  
The SEARCH window appears.  
2. Type in any word that should appear in the  
DESCRIPTION field of the entry you are looking for.  
3. Touch  
If you still do not see the desired entry, touch  
display the following matching entries.  
to  
121  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4. Touch  
when you find the desired entry.  
This function does not distinguish between upper- and  
lower-case letters.  
Editing  
entries  
Select the file in which the desired entry is stored.  
2. Select the entry in the Index mode or display it in the  
View mode.  
3. Press  
to open the Edit mode.  
4. Make the desired changes.  
5. Touch  
The new, correct entry is now stored.  
Deleting  
entries  
Deleting single entries  
1. Select the entry in the Index mode or display it in the  
View mode.  
2. Press  
touch  
and select DATA  
DELETION.  
A submenu opens.  
3. Select SELECTED ENTRY.  
A warning message will appear asking if you are sure you  
want to delete the entry.  
4. Touch  
(or  
to cancel the deletion).  
You can also delete single entries by pressing  
step 2 above.  
in  
Deleting all entries  
1. Press  
, touch  
in the Index or View  
mode and select DATA DELETION.  
A submenu appears.  
2. Select ALL ANN 1 or ALL ANN 2.  
A warning message will appear asking if you are sure you  
want to delete all entries in the file.  
122  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3. Touch  
(or  
to cancel the deletion).  
You can also delete all entries in both ANN files. Simply  
select ALL ANN FILES in step 2 above.  
q
It is not possible to delete all entries simultaneously if the  
unit is locked. See p. 282.  
The Ann  
application  
menus  
for  
Selects specific text or entries  
deletion (see p. 122).  
123  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
This chapter will discuss using the Tel  
(Telephone) and User File applications.  
The two applications are actually identical in  
the way that they function, except that they  
have different default file and field names to  
accommodate different types of information.  
The flexibility of these applications allows  
you to manage a wide variety of information,  
from a simple address book to an extensive  
restaurant guide or even a listing of your  
favorite movies. You can even store graphic  
images in each entry.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The Tel and User File Applications  
Each application comes with three files (or directories).  
l
The three Tel files are all set up by default to manage a  
simple address book. Each entry is set up to contain  
three fields (Name, Number, and Address).  
l
The three User File directories are set up by default as  
follows:  
USER FILE 1  
Business card file containing eight text  
fields (Company, Name, Position,  
Ext./Direct, Department, Tel. number,  
Fax number, Address) and one picture  
field (Map)  
Restaurant guide file containing seven  
text fields (Cuisine, Name, Number,  
Address, Prices, Attire, Remarks) and  
one picture field (Map)  
USER FILE 2  
USER FILE 3  
Free file containing five text fields  
You can store information in any file you want.  
Remember that you can easily change these settings to  
meet your personal needs. See page 133 for more  
information on  
these applications.  
Before beginning a particular operation, you must first  
select a file you want to work with.  
Selecting a  
file  
1. Press  
or  
to open the desired  
application.  
2. Press  
and touch  
to open the VIEWS  
menu. The currently selected file is marked with an  
asterisk.  
3. Select the desired file.  
In the Index mode, you can select a file simply by  
touching the tab of the desired file.  
126  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
In the Tel or User File application,  
Making new  
entries  
Select the file in which you  
to store the information  
using the procedure shown above.  
2. Press [NEW).  
The Edit mode opens.  
3. Type in all the information desired in each field.  
l
In the Name field of a Tel entry, enter the last name  
first if you want to sort entries by last names.  
You must always enter information in the first field.  
l
t on  
01  
. ..__.....___.....__.....! . . .  
POSI TI ON  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
DEPARTMENT  
TEL NUMEER  
t Coast Region  
__ __  
__  
__ __  
__  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
FAX NUMBER  
Plaza, Ne w Jersey)  
ADDRESS  
4. Touch  
when you are tinished.  
The message “Stored!” will appear briefly, indicating that  
the entry is now stored in memory.  
See p. 130 regarding how to enter graphic images into  
the picture field.  
Entries in the Tel and User File applications are stored  
alphabetically based on the contents of the first field.  
There are three basic ways to find and display an entry.  
Finding  
entries  
Using the Index mode  
1. Go to the Index mode.  
2. Touch the tab for the file you believe the entry is in.  
3. Touch the tab of the letter that the entry begins with.  
If you do not see the entry you are looking for, press  
until you do.  
127  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4. Select the entry, then touch  
Touch the entry twice.  
to see it in detail.  
Search by heading  
If you know the contents of the first field of the entry you  
are looking for, the Go To search is a very fast way to  
retrieve the entry.  
1. In the View or Index mode, type in the first few letters of  
the first field of the entry.  
The GO TO window will open, filled in with the letters you  
have typed.  
2. Touch  
l
If you do not see the entry you are looking for, press  
until you do.  
in the Index mode, select the entry and touch  
see it in detail.  
Go To search does not distinguish between upper- and  
lower-case letters.  
Using keywords  
If you are not sure of the name or the contents of the first  
field of an entry, but you do know a word that appears in  
the entry, then use the Search function to find it.  
Press (SEARCH).  
The SEARCH window appears.  
2. Type in a word that appears in the entry you are looking  
for.  
3. Touch  
not see the entry you are looking for, touch  
you do.  
Touch  
when you find the entry.  
The Search function does not distinguish between  
and lower-case letters.  
128  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Index mode or display it in the  
Edit mode with the cursor in the  
1. Select the entry in the  
Editing  
entries  
View mode.  
2. Press  
The entry opens in the  
first field.  
3. Make any desired changes.  
Touch  
at any time to discard any changes you  
have made.  
4. Touch  
when you have finished.  
The message “Stored!” will appear briefly, indicating that  
the changes are now stored in memory.  
If you changed the contents of the first field, the entry is  
resorted based on the changes.  
Deleting single entries  
Deleting  
entries  
1. Select the entry you want to delete in the Index mode, or  
open it in the View mode.  
2. Press  
, touch  
and select DATA  
DELETION.  
3. Select SELECTED ENTRY.  
A warning message will appear asking if you are sure you  
want to delete the entry.  
4. Touch  
(or  
to cancel the deletion).  
You can also delete single entries by pressing  
step 2 above.  
in  
Deleting all entries  
1. Press (MENU), touch  
want to clear all entries.  
, and select the file you  
and select DATA  
2. Press  
, touch  
DELETION.  
3. From the submenu, select SELECTED FILE.  
129  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
A warning message will appear asking if you are sure you  
want to delete all entries in the selected file.  
4. Touch  
(or [NO] to cancel the deletion).  
You can also delete all entries in all three of the  
application’s files. Simply select ALL TEL FILES or ALL  
USER FILES in step 3 above.  
It is not possible to delete all entries either in a single file  
or in all three files simultaneously if the unit is locked.  
See p. 282.  
Using  
picture  
fields  
Any drawing created in the Scrapbook can be copied  
and then pasted into a picture field. Both the Tel and  
User File applications can have picture fields. These  
pictures can be, for example, hand drawn maps, notes, or  
a signature.  
For information about defining field types, see p. 134.  
Adding a picture to an entry  
To add a picture to an entry, first be sure that the file you  
are using has at least one field set up as a picture field.  
USER FILES 1 and 2 come set up with a picture field  
While entering or editing an entry in the Edit mode:  
1. Press  
to open the application.  
2. Press  
or  
to display the desired drawing.  
If you have not yet made a drawing, make one now and  
press  
.
3. Press (2nd)  
or press (2nd)  
to copy the drawing to the clipboard,  
then touch if you will not  
need the drawing again in the Scrapbook application;  
this saves memory since the drawing is not duplicated.  
4. Press  
to go back to the application.  
5. Move to the picture field.  
130  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6. Press (2nd)  
to paste the picture into the field.  
.TEL. NUMBER  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. . . _. . "  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.FAX NUMBER  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. . . "  
.
. Sha r .p Pl a.z a , Ne w J e. r. s. e.y.  
[ Pa s t e pi c t ur e he r e ]  
. ADDRESS.  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
_.  
"
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
I
.
.
.
MAP  
Note that the message in the field changes from “Paste  
picture here” to “Touch to view picture.”  
7. Touch  
Viewing the contents of picture fields  
If you want to see the contents of the picture field, simply  
touch the message “Touch to view picture”. This will  
display the picture.  
Editing the contents of picture fields  
Contents of picture fields cannot be edited directly in the  
Tel and User File applications. Amend them by replacing  
the old picture with a new one, or edit by copying the  
picture back to the Scrapbook application.  
1. In the View mode touch the message “Touch to view  
picture” to open the picture you want to edit, then press  
(2nd)  
.
If you are in the Edit mode, move the cursor to the  
picture field, then press (2nd)  
.
The picture is copied to the clipboard.  
Press  
Press  
to open the application.  
The picture is pasted to the drawing page.  
4. Make any changes desired to the picture and press  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5. Copy the revised picture and paste it back to the picture  
field in the Tel or User File entry opened in the Edit  
mode (see p. 136).  
Be sure to touch  
after pasting to store the entry  
with the new picture.  
Deleting the contents of picture fields  
1.  
2.  
Open the entry in the Edit mode whose picture field  
contents you want to delete.  
Move to the picture field.  
3. Press  
The picture is opened with a message asking if you are  
sure you want to delete the contents of the field.  
4.  
Touch  
5. Touch  
(or  
to cancel the deletion).  
when you have finished editing the entry.  
Deleting a picture from the picture field in the Tel or User  
File does not affect entries in the Scrapbook.  
The Tel  
application  
menus  
Selects the TEL1 file.  
Selects the TEL2 file.  
Selects the TEL3 file.  
TELEPHONE FILE 1  
* TELEPHONE FILE 2  
TELEPHONE FILE 3  
FILTER ON/OFF  
Turning the Filer function on  
allows you to view only specified  
entries (see p. 214).  
,
SET SECRET STAT1  
Selects specific text or entries  
for  
CONFIGURE TELEPHONE 1  
CONFIGURE  
CONFIGURE TELEPHDNE 3  
132  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Selects the USER FILE 1.  
Selects the USER FILE 2.  
Selects the USER FILE 3.  
The User File  
application  
menus  
USER FILE  
USER FILE 2  
USER FILE 3  
ILTER  
Turning the Filter function on  
allows you to view only specified  
entries (see p. 214).  
I
Sets the entry as secret or  
non-secret (see p. 284).  
SET SECRET STATUS  
Selects specific text or entries for  
deletion (see p. 129).  
DATA DELETION  
CONFIGURE USER FILE 1  
CONFIGURE USER FILE 2  
CONFIGURE USER FILE 3  
Define your own file and index  
format (see p. 133).  
Customizing the Tel and User File Applications  
You can  
the Tel and User File applications in  
the following three ways:  
l
l
File names: you can give each file a name of up to  
characters of your choice.  
Fields: you can change the field names (up to 12  
characters per field), the field type (text or picture), and  
the number of fields that each entry can have (up to 16).  
l
The Index mode display: you can determine which  
fields (up to 3) are displayed in the Index mode and  
how many characters are displayed for each field (up to  
38 characters total).  
Changing 1. Press  
or  
to open the application  
file names  
containing the file that you want to change the name of.  
2. Press touch and select one of the  
three CONFIGURE menus.  
The CONFIGURE submenu appears.  
133  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Select FILE NAME. The FILE NAME window opens.  
3.  
file  
n
a
m
e
4. Press  
to clear the current name.  
5. Enter the new name (up to characters).  
Letters, numbers, and symbols can all be entered.  
6. Touch  
to store the new name.  
to cancel any changes and leave the  
(Or  
original file name.)  
If you do not want to change the number of entry fields,  
skip steps 1-6 below.  
Configuring  
fields  
1.  
2.  
Press (TEL) or  
you want to set up the fields in.  
to open the application that  
Press , touch  
, and select one of the  
three CONFIGURE menus.  
The CONFIGURE submenu appears.  
Select FILE NAME. The FILE NAME window opens.  
3.  
134  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
used in this file.  
Move to “Number of fields” and press (al  
clear the current number in the field.  
to  
4.  
5.  
Enter the number of fields that you want your entries to  
have.  
If you decrease the number of fields for a file that has  
some entries stored, fields will be deleted from the bottom  
of the file until the decreased number of fields is reached.  
The information stored in those fields will also be deleted.  
Touch  
(Or  
original number,)  
to store the number of fields you entered.  
to cancel any changes and leave the  
6.  
7.  
Press  
, touch  
and select one of the  
three CONFIGURE menus.  
The CONFIGURE submenu appears.  
Select FIELD NAME. The FIELD NAME window opens.  
8.  
field data type:  
fields marked for  
TEXT store text,  
FI ELD NAME  
and fields marked  
for PICTURE store  
graphic images.  
FI ELD .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
FI ELD __3_i_ TEXT .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
FI ELD  
.
.
.
.
.
.
FI ELD  
FI ELD  
FI ELD  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
NUMBER .  
c
l
.
-Field name: enter  
the name of the  
field (up to 12  
characters).  
Move to the desired fields and change them as required.  
9.  
l
Use  
to clear the current name.  
l
Enter the new name (up to 12 characters). Letters,  
numbers, and symbols can all be entered.  
135  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
l
Touch  
data types.  
to toggle between the two  
when you have finished.  
10. Touch  
(Or  
to cancel the changes and leave the fields  
as they were.)  
l
If you change the data type setting of a field between  
TEXT and PICTURE, all entries made in the field at the  
previous setting will be deleted.  
l
The data type for Field 1 is TEXT and cannot be  
changed. You can specify PICTURE for any of the  
remaining 15 fields. However, picture data requires  
greater memory space than text data and the picture  
data space for each entry is limited. You cannot paste  
pictures to an entry exceeding this limit.  
The fax number field is used by the fax function for  
a fax number automatic dialing. While the User File has a fax number  
Configuring  
field  
field built in, one must be set up for the Tel application.  
To do so, follow the procedure above. In step 8, enter  
FAX NUMBER as one of your fields, and touch STORE  
when you are finished.  
When entering fax numbers in the FAX NUMBER field,  
be sure to include hyphens in the appropriate places. A  
hyphen following the area code is necessary for the fax  
function to correctly dial locally or long distance, as  
specified during faxing.  
Customizing You can set up a different Index format for each of the  
the Index  
display  
three files in the Tel and User File applications,  
designating up to three fields you want displayed in the  
Index mode and the number of characters for each field.  
In the Tel or User File application,  
1. Press (MENU), touch  
three CONFIGURE menus.  
and select one of the  
2. Select INDEX FORM. The INDEX FORM window opens.  
136  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Field name  
FORM  
Number of characters  
currently set to be  
displayed in the Index  
mode.  
COMPANY  
NAME  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. . .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
POSI TI .ON .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
I
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
I
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
DEPARTMENT  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 12.. . . . . . . . . .  
TEL NUMBER  
. . . . . . . . I...  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. . . .  
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
FAX NUMBER  
l
l
From one to three fields can be displayed in the Index  
mode.  
The total number of characters you can have for all  
fields is 38.  
3. Select and enter 0 in those fields that you do not want to  
appear in the Index mode.  
4. Select the fields that you want to appear in the Index  
mode, and enter the number of characters that you want  
the field to be able to hold. Remember that the total  
maximum number of characters for all fields is 38.  
If the desired fields are not all displayed, use  
to scroll the display.  
and  
5. Touch  
when you have finished (or  
to cancel the changes).  
l
You can set any text fields to be displayed in the Index  
mode. No matter which fields appear in the Index,  
entries are sorted and accessed by the contents of the  
first field.  
l
You must set at least one field to be displayed.  
137  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
138  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
This chapter explains the features of the  
Notebook application, the unit’s built-in  
word processor, and the Outline application,  
a simple but powerful outliner for structuring  
your thoughts, ideas, and writings. Used  
together, first outlining a document and then  
developing it in the Notebook, these two  
applications provide powerful word  
processing capabilities in a hand-held device.  
139  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The Notebook Application  
The unit’s Notebook application provides you with a  
simple yet powerful means of recording information, from  
notes at a meeting and letters to passages of a speech.  
As with a standard word processor, the Notebook lets  
you set margins, tabs and indents, select A4, letter, or  
legal page size, turn word wrap on or off, and change  
fonts. With a printer connected to the unit, this gives you  
the capability to print out attractive full-page letters,  
reports and other documents (see p. 152).  
Before reading this chapter, be sure you have read  
“Editing Techniques” in Chapter 2. More advanced  
editing features are used in this chapter. Be sure you  
have a good understanding of basic editing procedures  
used on the unit before beginning to use the Notebook  
application.  
Making new  
entries  
Enter the following:  
Title:  
Text:  
Letter to Frank  
May IO, 1994  
Mr. Frank Smith  
Chairman  
ABC Co. Ltd.  
Dear Mr. Smith:  
Thank you for your fax of May  
1994  
regarding the Alpha Project.  
We agree that it is too difficult to answer  
your questions about our new project  
properly based on the available information.  
We will receive the proper documentation  
within the next week.  
This shouldn’t cause any delay in our  
production schedules.  
Sincerely,  
140  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1. Press  
to open the application.  
As with the other applications you have used, the  
Notebook application opens in the Index mode.  
2. Press [NEW).  
3. Enter the contents. Type the letter above.  
It is not necessary to press  
at the end of each line.  
The unit will automatically forward the words to the new  
line which would be split between two lines.  
J-Indicates that the tex-t  
PAGE  
displayed on the first  
W e  
answer your questions about our new  
project based on the available  
information.+  
that it is too difficult to  
line of the screen is  
on the first page of a  
two-page entry.  
.
documentation within the next week.4  
This shouldn’t cause in our  
Production schedules.  
4. Touch  
5. The unit will prompt you for a title. Type in “Letter to  
Frank”.  
6. Touch  
The entry is now stored.  
141  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Making a  
new entry  
based on  
an existing  
entry  
Once you have written this letter to Frank, you may need  
to write a similar letter to someone else. Rather than  
having to format another letter, you can instead make a  
copy of an existing letter and simply change the new  
person’s name and address.  
The unit allows you to quickly make a copy of an existing  
entry which you can begin editing immediately.  
1.  
Select an existing entry  
2. Press (2nd)  
3. Make any necessary changes to the entry. You may want  
to change the title so as not to confuse this entry with the  
original.  
4.  
Touch  
The unit now saves this copy without effecting the  
original. If you return to the INDEX view you will see  
both the original entry and this new entry.  
Finding  
entries  
Notebook entries are stored alphabetically according to  
their title. There are three options to find an entry in the  
application, depending on the situation.  
Using the Index mode  
1.  
Go to the Index mode.  
date on which  
the entry was  
created or last edited.  
number of pages  
included in the entry.  
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
I
2.  
Touch the tab of the letter that the title of the entry begins  
with.  
142  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
a n d  
.
You can also use  
3. Select the entry, then touch  
to see it in detail.  
Touch the entry twice.  
The full entry is displayed.  
If an entry is so long that it cannot all fit on the screen,  
you can press or (NEXT) to move through the  
entry one display screen at a time, or  
or  
to  
scroll one line at a time.  
Search by title  
1. In the View or Index mode, type in the first few characters  
of the title of the entry you are looking for.  
The GO TO window will open, filled in with the letters you  
typed.  
2. Touch  
l
If you still do not see the desired entry, press  
until you do.  
l
If you are in the Index mode, select the entry and touch  
to see it in detail.  
This does not distinguish between upper- and lower-case  
letters.  
Using keywords  
If you cannot remember the exact title of an entry, but  
you know a word or words that appear somewhere in the  
entry (including its TITLE field), use the Search function  
to find the entry.  
1. Press [SEARCH).  
The SEARCH window appears.  
2. Type in the words you remember in the entry you are  
looking for.  
3. Touch  
If you still do not see the desired entry, touch  
display the following matching entries.  
to  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4. Touch  
when you find the entry.  
The Search function does not distinguish between  
and lower-case letters.  
Editing  
entries  
1. Select the entry in the Index mode or display it in the  
View mode.  
Press (EDIT).  
The entry opens in the Edit mode.  
3. Make any desired changes.  
If you are working with a long piece of text that goes off  
the display, use  
by line, or use  
or  
or  
to scroll up or down line  
to move up or down  
within the text one display screen at a time.  
4. Touch  
Touch  
when you are finished.  
at any time before touching  
to discard any changes you have made.  
Deleting  
entries  
Deleting single entries  
1. Select the entry you want to delete in the Index mode, or  
display it in the View mode.  
2. Press  
, touch  
and select DATA  
DELETION.  
3. Select SELECTED ENTRY.  
A warning message appears asking if you are sure you  
want to delete the entry.  
4. Touch  
(or  
to cancel the deletion).  
You can also delete single entries by pressing  
step 2 above.  
in  
Deleting all entries  
1. Press  
, touch  
, and select DATA  
DELETION.  
2. Select ALL NOTEBOOK DATA.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
A warning message appears asking if you are sure you  
want to delete all entries in the application.  
Touch  
(or  
to cancel the deletion).  
3.  
It is not possible to delete all entries simultaneously if the  
unit is locked. See p. 282.  
You may find that there are times when you want to make  
the characters larger so that they will be easier to read.  
This is easy to do. To select a large character size,  
Changing  
the character  
size on the  
display  
simply touch  
will be displayed in a large format (40 x 8 characters on  
the display), and the button will switch to . To  
in the Edit or View mode. The text  
return to the regular format (40 x 12 characters), touch  
.
to the  
PAGE  
2
t o Fr a nk  
May 18, 1994  
Mr . Fr a nk Smith  
Chai r ma n  
ABC c o.  
@e a r Mr . Smith:  
Tha nk  
f or your f a x of Ma y  
1994  
r e ga r di ng t he  
Pr oj e c t .  
Large character format  
In large format, characters exceeding 40 x 8 go off the  
display. To see them, use the cursor keys.  
l
While the large character size may be easier to read  
and to work with when selecting text for copying, for  
example, using the small size makes it possible to  
include more text on the display.  
l
Changing the character size on the display does not  
affect the size of printed text.  
145  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
When editing or revising an entry in the Notebook  
application, you may want to change or delete only a  
single word or one string of text in that entry. Or you may  
simply want to locate a word or text string while viewing  
an entry. The FIND TEXT feature in the application menu  
makes it easy to find up to a 20-character string of text  
(including spaces).  
Searching  
for specific  
words in the  
text  
1. In the View or Edit mode, press  
and select FIND TEXT  
, touch  
Press  
The FIND TEXT window opens.  
TEXT  
Find text  
containing:  
2. Enter the text you want to find.  
3. Touch  
.
The window closes and the text search starts from the  
beginning of the entry. When a match is found, the first  
matching text in the entry is selected. If you are in the  
Edit mode, you can delete, cut, copy, paste or edit the  
text as desired. To continue searching for the same text,  
repeat steps 1 and 3 above. The unit will begin  
searching from the location of the last match.  
If no matching text is found, a message indicating this is  
displayed.  
No matter where the cursor was in an entry, any new  
search starts from the beginning of the entry.  
Changing  
character  
The unit offers you four character (font) styles-plain,  
underline, italic, and bold-that can be applied to text.  
(font) styles Plain is the default style. Underline can also be used in  
combination with italic and bold. The font styles add  
146  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
richness to the way your text appears, and can be used,  
for example, to differentiate titles of books and other  
works from regular text or to emphasize importance.  
The styles are included when you print a document on a  
printer that is compatible with your unit (consult your  
printer manual).  
1. In the Edit mode, press  
select SET FONT STYLE.  
, touch  
and  
A submenu appears. An asterisk indicates the current font  
style settings.  
( SET I NDENTS  
2. Select the style that you want the text you will enter to be  
in. For example, touch UNDERLINE if you want the text  
you are going to enter to be underlined.  
The menu closes.  
3. Type the text you want to enter.  
The text appears in the selected style.  
t o Fr a nk  
PAGE  
2
Mar  
Mr. Frank  
Chai  
ABC Co.  
Mr  
Thank  
We  
for  
fax Mar  
1994  
to  
regarding the  
that it is too  
answer  
questions about our new  
Project  
based on the available  
information.4  
147  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The settings remain in effect until another font style is  
selected. To change the font style back to plain or to  
another style, repeat the above procedure, making the  
appropriate selection.  
You can also use keyboard shortcuts to change the font  
style, which make it possible to change font styles “on the  
fly” from the keyboard. The keyboard shortcuts (which  
are indicated on the SET FONT STYLE submenu) are as  
follows:  
(2nd)  
Plain  
Underline  
Italic  
Bold  
(I  
To change the font style of text that has already been  
entered, select the text in the Edit mode by dragging the  
pen across it, then choose a font style from the menu, or  
by using keyboard shortcuts.  
l
l
The font style cannot be changed within the TITLE field.  
The underline setting remains in effect until plain is  
reselected.  
Any text inserted into a block takes on the font style of  
the block of text.  
Using  
indents and  
tabs  
Indents and tabs let you format the appearance of text  
and blocks of text. The difference between an indent and  
a tab is that, once entered, an indent setting remains in  
effect until it is turned off or changed. In other words, if  
you set an indent, all text entered after that will also be  
indented. A tab affects a single line only.  
Setting indents  
Text indenting can be turned on and off, and text can be  
indented from the left margin and/or right margin, using  
the application menu. Indent off is the default setting. On  
your unit, indents are set by specifying the number of  
characters you want to indent. For example, if you enter 5  
as the indent, a line will be indented by five spaces.  
148  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
You can specify as many indents as you want in an entry.  
However, it is not possible to change the setting in the  
middle of a paragraph (which ends with J).  
The maximum number of characters you can specify for  
indents depends on the page format (see p. 153).  
1. In the Edit mode, place the cursor on the line where you  
want to start indenting.  
2. Press  
, touch  
and select SET  
INDENTS.  
Indicates the current  
setting in the cursor  
position line.  
SET INDENTS  
The number of  
characters to indent  
INDENTING  
r
text from the left and  
right, respectively.  
. .L. . .E. . . F. . .T. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..I . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
. . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
RIGHT  
FIRST LINE  
. . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
. . . . . . .  
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
number of  
characters to indent tl  
first line of each new  
paragraph.  
3. Select ON in the INDENTING field.  
4. Move to the field you want to set an indent for. Press  
to delete the current value and enter the number of  
characters you want to indent.  
5. Touch  
when you have finished making all the  
to cancel the settings).  
desired settings (or  
When indenting is turned on, is shown on the display  
at the indent position. All current text or text entered after  
q
will be indented the specified number of characters  
from the left or right until indenting is turned off or  
changed.  
149  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Turning indenting on automatically sets FIRST LINE to 1,  
its minimum value. If you have set a LEFT indent, and  
want to indent the first lines of paragraphs even further  
than this, note that the indent settings are always counted  
from the far left margin and so the FIRST LINE setting  
must be greater than the LEFT indent setting.  
STORE  
LEFT  
indent  
LARGE  
t o Fr a nk  
T indent  
Mar 1994  
Mr. Frank  
FIRST LINE  
We asree that it is too  
difficult to answer  
questions  
about our new Project  
An entry with indents set  
Changing or  
indents  
To re-format text for which indents have been set, or to  
change to a different layout from the one selected at the  
beginning of the document, follow the procedure below.  
1. In the Edit mode, position the cursor where you want the  
change to take effect.  
2. Press (MENU), touch  
and select SET  
INDENTS.  
The SET INDENTS window appears and ON or  
INHERITED is selected in the INDENTING field.  
3. To cancel the indent, select OFF.  
To change the indent, select ON and enter the new  
values in any fields you want.  
To cancel an indent and use the setting which has been  
applied to the text above the paragraph you are working  
in, select INHERITED.  
4. Touch  
The text on the line the cursor is on and all text that  
150  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
follows or is entered subsequently is laid out according to  
the new setting.  
l
If the cursor is positioned anywhere within a paragraph,  
the whole paragraph and all text following it will be laid  
out according to the new setting. A setting change can  
only be made starting from a line which is immediately  
preceded by  
l
If you have changed any of the indent settings and  
attempt to store the new settings without selecting ON  
in the INDENTING field, the unit will prompt you to  
recheck the settings.  
Tab settings  
In the default settings, eight tab positions are specified at  
intervals of four characters each. Pressing  
moves the cursor to the next tab position to the right. In  
the insertion mode, this shifts any text following the  
cursor. (This works only in the Notebook application.)  
You can change the default four-character setting for  
each individual entry using SET TABS in the application  
menu.  
As with indents, the unit for this setting is the number of  
characters. You can have up to eight tab settings per line.  
1. In the Edit mode, press  
, touch  
and  
select SET TABS.  
SET TABS  
.
.
.
.
”
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
I
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
TAB 1 sets the first tab position, TAB 2 sets the second,  
etc. Tab position settings are measured by the number of  
characters from the beginning of the line.  
151  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2. Move to the field you want to change and enter the  
desired number of characters.  
3. Touch  
desired settings (or  
settings).  
when you have finished making all the  
to leave the original  
Turning  
word wrap  
on and off  
Word wrap automatically moves text which will not fit onto  
the end of a line to a new line, preventing words from  
being split when you type. The default setting for the  
unit’s word wrap function is on. There may be times,  
however, when you want to turn off the word wrap  
function. This can be done for each individual entry.  
1. In the Edit mode, press  
, touch  
, and  
select SET PAGE FORMAT.  
2. Select OFF in the WORD-WRAPPING field.  
3. Touch  
To turn word wrap back on for an entry, repeat the  
procedure and select ON in step 2.  
Printing a  
full-size  
document  
So far you have worked only in the limited space of the  
unit’s display. However, you can make the text fit on a  
standard letter-size sheet in order to print out full-size  
documents.  
The following sections will discuss page layout and  
printing. If you will not be printing your Notebook entries  
and are using the Notebook only for keeping short notes  
and memos, you can skip over these sections.  
For a full explanation of printing, see p. 222.  
Setting the margins  
The unit’s display is smaller than a standard letter-size  
sheet (8.5” x 11 However, the display can be set up to  
work like a “floating window” which moves across the  
page, letting you create full-size documents. For novice  
users, the default right and bottom page margins in the  
Notebook have been set to make the writing area-the  
152  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
part of the page text is entered to-the same size as the  
display.  
1 inch top margin  
Organizer  
1 inch  
left  
margin  
4.16 inch  
right margin  
Display  
US full-size letter page  
8 inch bottom margin  
Default  
settings  
If you want to change the default margins, for example, to  
print full-size documents, you can do so for individual  
entries using the application menu.  
1. In the Edit mode, press  
, touch  
and  
select SET PAGE FORMAT.  
A window opens showing all of the page format settings.  
BOTTOM . MARGI .N . . 8 .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
LEFT MARGI N  
RI GHT MARGI N 4. 16  
.
.
.
.
PI CA  
PS  
PRI NT FONT  
153  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2. Move to the margin field you want to change-TOP,  
BOTTOM, LEFT, or RIGHT-then use  
to delete  
the current values, and enter the desired ones.  
3. Touch  
The new page format for the entry is now stored.  
With a page format that is larger than the unit’s display,  
the display functions as a floating window and moves  
around the page. You can type text continuously and the  
display will automatically shift across the page.  
To view text currently off the display in either the View or  
Edit mode, use the cursor keys. In the View mode, the  
display moves vertically one line at a time. In the Edit  
mode, the display shifts in the same way as for typing in  
text. You can also press  
or  
to move the  
display up or down, respectively, one display screen at a  
time.  
The minimum margin setting is 0.5”.  
Inserting a page break  
The unit automatically inserts a page break at the end of  
a page (according to the selected page size). A page  
break is indicated on the display by a dotted line.  
However, you can also insert a page break yourself for  
layout purposes. These page breaks are entered as code  
in the entry, and are also marked by dotted lines on the  
display.  
1. In the Edit mode, position the cursor at the location where  
you want to insert a page break.  
2. Press  
touch  
and select INSERT  
PAGE BREAK.  
is entered at the cursor position, and subsequent text  
is moved to a new page.  
Use  
break.  
to delete  
q
to cancel a user-created page  
154  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
View page layout  
If you are working with a full-size page, and you want to  
check that text is formatting properly on the page, you  
can do so using PAGE LAYOUT in the application menu.  
While this function does not allow you to read the entered  
text, it does show you the full page at one time.  
In the View or Edit mode, press  
and select PAGE LAYOUT.  
, touch  
Current page/total number of pages  
2. If you are working with a document several pages long,  
o
r
you can view different pages by pressing  
(NEXT).  
3. Touch  
to return to the normal display.  
Selecting the paper size and font type for printing  
When you have an entry that you want to print, you need  
to select the size of paper and the font that you want to  
use to print the entry (on a printer connected to the unit).  
These selections are made through the Notebook  
application menu.  
1. In the Edit mode, press (MENU) , touch  
and  
select SET PAGE FORMATS.  
155  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SET PAGE FORMATS  
OFF  
PAGE SI .ZE  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
- -  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. . TOP. . MARGI. N  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. BOTTOM . MARGI. N 8.  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
"
.
.
.
I
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
LEFT MARGI N . 1 .  
. RI GHT . . MARGI. N .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
4.. 1.6  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
<.  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
I
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
PRI NT FONT  
2. Move to the PAGE SIZE field and select the size that  
corresponds to the size of the paper you will be using in  
your printer.  
The three page sizes available are Letter (8.5 x 11 in.),  
A4 (210 x 297 mm), and Legal (8.5 x 14 in.).  
3. Move to the PRINT FONT field and select the font that  
you want.  
ELITE is a well-known font, which is set at 12 cpi  
(characters per inch).  
PICA is also a common font, set at  
cpi.  
PS is proportional spacing (spacing between letters is  
adjusted depending on the letter’s width), set at 12 cpi.  
You will be able to fit more text on a printed page using a  
12 cpi font than using a  
cpi font.  
4. Touch (or press  
to cancel the  
settings).  
l
l
Selecting a paper size that your printer is not set up for  
may delay or prevent printing. Consult your printer  
manual regarding printer set-up.  
The selected font is not shown on the unit’s display, but  
only when printed out. However, you can check the  
layout when ELITE or PICA is selected using PAGE  
LAYOUT in the application menu. See p. 155. When  
PS is selected, the text is displayed on the unit in the  
same format as for ELITE.  
156  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The  
Notebook  
application  
menus  
Locates a text using (of up to 20  
characters) in an entry (see p. 146).  
Inserts a page break at the cursor  
location (see p. 154).  
PAGE BREAK  
SET SECRET STATUS  
DATA  
Sets the entry as secret or  
non-secret (see p. 284).  
Selects specific text or entries for  
deletion (see p. 144).  
Sets the character (font) style, such  
as bold, underline, italic (see  
p. 146).  
SET FONT STYLE  
SET PAGE FORMAT  
Formats the page, including page  
size, word wrap, margins and print  
font (see p. 153).  
SET I NDENTS  
-Sets tab positions (see p. 151).  
the paragraph indents (see  
p. 148).  
The unit’s Outline application is a simple, convenient tool  
to help you order information or key points of your  
thoughts and writings in a clear, easy-to-understand  
hierarchical structure. This is ideal for organizing your  
plans and ideas, and the application’s features provide  
the flexibility to restructure the order whenever necessary.  
The outline structure consists of a title and one or more  
topics, which can have one or more subtopics. These  
topics can be rearranged, grouped together, or even  
hidden from view, so that you can manage a lot of  
information easily and efficiently.  
Each topic in an outline is much like an entry in the other  
applications, and the outline itself can be thought of as a  
file holding all of those topics (or entries). But in an  
outline, you can enter, edit, or delete topics while  
maintaining an overview of the entire outline and its  
topics.  
157  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Below is an example of how a price list might look in the  
Outline application in full view mode.  
Creating an  
outline  
&wa r e  
Pr oduc t s  
$65. 00  
$29. 00  
PS- 117 $99. 95  
*Ac c e s s or i e s  
$49. 95  
Each individual topic heading is marked with a diamond.  
Up to 20 characters can be used as the title of an outline,  
and each single topic can contain up to 2,048 characters.  
Enter the outline above.  
Press (OUTLINE) to open the application.  
2. Press  
A title window appears.  
Type in title:  
3. Type in the title.  
4. Touch STORE].  
The View mode opens with the title as the first topic in  
the new outline. A flashing diamond prompts you to enter  
a topic.  
l
1994 Pr oduc t Pr i c e s  
158  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5. Type the first subtopic, pressing  
line.  
at the end of each  
When you begin typing, the display automatically  
switches to the Edit mode.  
l
1994 Pr oduc t Pr i c e s  
*Ha r dwa r e Pr oduc t s 4  
$ 1 9 9 . 9 5  
$ 1 7 9 . 9 5  
6. Touch  
Alternatively, you can press  
to discard the text  
you have entered. This will not cancel the entire outline  
but only the topic that is about to be stored.  
The View mode appears again, and the second and  
subsequent lines of the topic just entered disappear from  
view. This feature allows you to store a lot of information  
on one page but only see the first line (heading) of each  
topic. You can then selectively view the details of a  
particular topic when needed.  
7. Enter the other topics in the list above. Be sure to touch  
after entering each one.  
You can see that there is no final command to store the  
outline. You can exit one outline at any time by displaying  
another entry, changing to the Index mode, or creating a  
new outline by pressing (NEW).  
l
l
If you want to view the entire contents of a particular  
topic, touch the to ic, then [SHOW DETAIL (or press  
Touch DONE (or ress  
to return to the  
p
regular display.  
By editing, text first entered as the title can be extended  
to up to 2048 characters.  
159  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Finding  
outlines  
Outlines are stored in alphabetical order according to  
their titles.  
Using the Index mode  
1. Go to the Index mode.  
2. Touch a tab to display the entries stored there  
alphabetically.  
3. Select the desired entry and touch  
to see it in  
detail.  
Touch the desired outline twice.  
Search by title  
1. In the Index mode, type in the first few characters of the  
title of the entry you are looking for.  
The GO TO window will open, filled in with the letters you  
typed.  
2. Touch  
If you still do not see the desired entry, press  
until you do.  
3. Select the entry and touch  
to see it in detail.  
Go To search does not distinguish between upper- and  
lower-case letters.  
Using keywords  
If you know a word or words that appear in an entry  
though you cannot remember the exact title, then use the  
Search function to find the entry.  
1. Press  
The SEARCH window appears.  
2. Type in any word you remember in the entry you are  
looking for.  
3. Touch  
If you still do not see the desired entry, touch  
display the following matching entries.  
to  
160  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4. Touch  
when you find the entry you want.  
The Search function does not distinguish between  
and lower-case letters.  
Displaying  
full topics  
In the default settings, the Outline is set to display only  
the first line of each topic. You can change this to display  
an outline in full.  
1. Display the outline you want to work with in the View  
mode.  
2. Press  
touch  
and select 1 LINE/FULL  
VIEW.  
A submenu appears. An asterisk indicates the current  
selection.  
3. Select FULL TOPIC VIEW.  
All second and subsequent lines of all the topics appear.  
To return to the one-line view, follow the above  
procedure, but select 1 LINE TOPIC VIEW in step 3.  
To see contents that are off the display, scroll the display  
using  
and  
or the cursor keys.  
Changing the view mode in an outline does not affect the  
view mode setting of other outlines. However, a new  
entry adopts the same view mode as the entry that was  
last displayed.  
Revising  
outlines  
Once an outline has been created, it is easy to revise  
either the text in the outline or the outline structure itself.  
The text of topics and subtopics can be revised one at a  
time in the Edit mode. Restructuring outlines is carried  
out in the View mode.  
161  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Selecting topics  
Simply touch anywhere on a topic to select it. The  
flashing diamond indicates the currently selected topic.  
You can also move between topics one by one, using the  
cursor keys.  
Press  
to move directly to the last topic and  
to move directly to the first topic, i.e. the title.  
Editing text  
Only one topic can be edited at a time.  
1. Display the outline you want to revise in the View mode.  
2. Select the topic you want to edit.  
3. Press  
The cursor is positioned at the beginning of the text.  
(When in one-line view mode, the hidden lines of the  
topic appear.)  
4. Make any necessary changes.  
5. Touch  
(or  
to discard the changes).  
The new, edited topic is now stored.  
In the Outline application, pressing  
in the Index  
mode does not open the Edit mode.  
Adding topics  
As your plans and ideas grow, you may want to add  
topics to an existing outline. To add a topic at the end of  
an outline, display the outline in the View mode, and then  
press  
until you pass the last topic. Begin typing  
when the new diamond appears.  
To insert a new topic anywhere else in the outline, use  
the procedure below. Only one new topic can be inserted  
at a time.  
1. Display the outline that you want to add a topic to in the  
View mode.  
2. Press (INS).  
162  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
is displayed to indicate the insertion position.  
3. Move to the desired location using and  
4. Type in the new topic.  
5. Touch  
Press  
at any time before touching  
to cancel the insertion.  
You can also add a topic between existing topics by first  
selecting the topic after which you want to insert the new  
topic, then simply starting to type the new topic.  
Moving topics  
Even after you have stored a topic, you can change its  
location easily.  
1. In the View mode, select the topic you want to move.  
2. Press  
(the second row from the top on the  
keyboard).  
The entire topic is momentarily highlighted, then replaced  
3. Move  
q
to the new location using  
and  
4. Press (ENTER).  
q
reverts back to the full contents of the topic.  
Press  
at any time before pressing  
to  
cancel the move.  
Topics cannot be moved to a position above the title.  
Joining two topics into one  
You can join (merge) any two consecutive topics into one  
using the application menu. A selected topic is joined to  
the topic above it.  
1. In the View mode, select the topic you want to join to the  
one above it.  
163  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
If the entry is in the one-line view mode, select full view  
mode (see p. 168) to display all the hidden parts of the  
outline.  
2. Press  
, touch  
and select JOIN/SPLIT  
TOPIC.  
A submenu appears  
3. Select JOIN 2 TOPICS.  
The topic you selected is joined with the one above it.  
Pr oduc t Prices  
Pr oduc t s  
PB- 101 $199.95 $120.00  
PB- 102 $179. 95 $110.00  
Pr oduc t s  
PS- 117 $99. 95  
Beginning of topic  
*Accessories  
selected for joining.  
$49.95  
$99. 95  
$65.00  
Because no space is inserted between the two topics  
when they are joined, you may want to open the new,  
joined topic in the Edit mode and make any desired  
changes, for example adding a space, “and,” etc.  
If you attempt to join two topics which, when joined, will  
exceed the limit of 2,048 characters, the operation will be  
automatically  
and nothing will happen.  
Splitting one topic into two  
Any single topic can be easily divided (split) into two.  
1. In the View mode, select the topic you want to split.  
2. Press  
, touch  
and select JOIN/SPLIT  
TOPIC.  
A submenu appears.  
3. Select SPLIT 1 TOPIC INTO 2.  
The selected topic is displayed with the cursor positioned  
on the first character.  
164  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Pr oduc t Prices  
*Ha r dwa r e Pr oduc t s  
PB- 101 $199. 95 $120. 00  
PB- 102 $179.95 $110.00  
*Sof t wa r e Pr oduc t s  
$65.00  
PS- 117 $99. 95  
*Accessories  
$49. 95  
$29. 00  
Pa r t s  
4. Move the cursor to the point where you want to split the  
(on the last character of the first topic).  
topic  
OUTLI NE  
SPLIT 1 TOPIC INTO 2  
$49.95  
$65.00  
$99. 95  
Press  
5.  
The part of the topic following the cursor position  
becomes a new topic.  
If a topic that contains subtopics (see 167) is split, the  
subtopics are assigned to the second, new topic.  
Deleting topics  
Outline  
deletion  
In the View display mode, select the topic you want to  
delete.  
2. Press  
DELETION.  
, touch  
and select DATA  
A submenu appears.  
Select SELECTED FAMILY.  
3.  
The selected topic is highlighted, and a warning message  
appears if you are sure want to delete it.  
165  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4. Touch  
(or  
to cancel the deletion).  
You can also delete a selected topic (family) by pressing  
in step 2 above.  
If you select a topic for deletion, all the subtopics (see p.  
167) below it will also be deleted. You may want to  
rearrange an outline beforehand to prevent this (see p.  
169).  
Deleting an outline  
1. Select the outline you want to delete in the Index mode or  
display it in the View mode.  
2. Press  
, touch  
and select DATA  
DELETION.  
A submenu appears.  
3. Select SELECTED OUTLINE.  
A warning message appears asking if you are sure you  
want to delete the outline.  
4. Touch  
(or  
to cancel the deletion).  
You can also delete an outline by pressing  
in step  
2 above. To do this in the View mode, the title must be  
selected.  
Deleting all outlines  
1. In the Index or View mode press  
, touch  
and select DATA DELETION.  
A submenu appears.  
Select ALL OUTLINES.  
A warning message appears asking if you are sure you  
want to delete all outlines in the application.  
3. Touch  
(or  
to cancel the deletion).  
It is not possible to delete all outlines simultaneously if  
the unit is locked. See p. 282.  
166  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The examples used so far have only contained one level  
of topics (excluding the title, which is always on the first  
level by itself). This simple outline form may be all you  
need to organize your information. You can, however,  
create subtopics for greater flexibility. Each subtopic  
belongs to the particular topic that is on the next level  
above it. A subtopic can, in turn, have its own subtopics:  
these can continue for 15 levels below the title.  
Subtopics are often referred to as “childen,” the topic they  
belong to as the “parent,” and parents and children  
together as a “family.”  
Using  
subtopics  
(children)  
The example below shows an outline illustrating these  
points.  
Br a nc he s  
Parent  
s a l e s of f i c e  
40C di s t r i but i on c e nt e r  
*Bos t on s a l e s of f i c e  
Children  
t
of f i c e ( He a dqua r t e r s )  
di s t r i but i on c e nt e r  
The hollow diamond indicates that the topic is a parent  
(has subtopics) while a solid diamond indicates that the  
topic has no children. This is useful because a topic’s  
children may be hidden from view.  
You can create a subtopic by pressing I,) before  
creating or when moving a topic. It will then become a  
subtopic of the topic directly above it. If you later find it  
necessary to reorganize an outline, you can promote a  
subtopic to the same level as its parent topic using  
and  
Entering subtopics  
Create the example above.  
1. Press (OUTLINE) to open the application.  
2. Press (NEW) and type in a title for the outline, then  
167  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
touch  
3. Type in the first topic, then touch  
.
4. Press  
to make the second topic a child (subtopic)  
of “Northeast”.  
Touch the area to the right of .  
The cursor is now indented one character.  
Carp’s Branches  
*Nor  
t
5. Now type in the text of the topic, and touch  
when done.  
6. Continue entering the outline until you get to “Central”.  
7. Press  
to place the new topic “Central” on the same  
level as “Northeast”.  
Touch the area to the left of .  
Branches  
@Northeast  
sales office  
distribution  
sales off ice  
8. Continue and complete the outline in this manner.  
Collapsing families  
As an outline grows in size and depth, you may find it  
168  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
difficult to manage. The collapse function allows you to  
condense the view and later expand only those topics  
and families that you need to see.  
It hides all subtopics from view, displaying only first-level  
topics and the title.  
1. Display the outline in the View mode.  
2. Press  
touch  
and select COLLAPSE  
ALL.  
All subtopics are collapsed into their topics and  
eliminated from the display.  
Cor p' s Br a nc he s  
If you want to collapse only one specific family, select its  
parent topic and then press  
or touch for the  
topic. All subtopics belonging to that topic will be hidden  
from view.  
Expanding families  
All subtopics that have been collapsed in a family or in  
the entire outline can be expanded.  
1. Display the collapsed outline in the View mode.  
2. Select the topic you want to expand, or the title if you  
want to expand the entire outline.  
3. Press  
, touch  
and select EXPAND  
FAMILY.  
All subtopics of the selected topic are displayed to the  
furthest level beneath the topic.  
169  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
You can also expand a family to display only the  
next-level subtopics below the parent topic. Select the  
topic whose next-level subtopics you want to see and  
press  
or touch 0 for the topic.  
Restructuring families  
You can move, delete, join and divide families just as you  
can topics. You can also use  
to move directly from  
a selected topic to its parent. However, these operations  
will affect the entire family regardless of whether or not  
the topic is collapsed and its subtopics are visible.  
So you have to proceed with caution. The following  
restrictions apply when working with families.  
l
You may not be able to change the level of a collapsed  
family in certain situations. No other topics may be  
moved into a family unless the family is expanded. In  
general, if you are having problems with moving,  
expand all of the families (see above) and then try the  
desired move again.  
l
You cannot insert a topic between a parent and its child  
at the same level as a parent. For example, pressing  
in the situation below would not move the flashing  
q
to the left.  
OUTLINE  
Branches  
*Northeast  
*NY sales office  
distribution center  
sales office  
*Chicago off ice (Headquarters  
*DC distribution center  
l
When moving topics (or families):  
a. You cannot indent a topic more than one character  
to the right of the topic directly above it.  
b. You cannot indent a topic directly below a collapsed  
family. You first have to expand the family.  
170  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
c. You cannot move a topic one character to the left if  
this action would split up a parent and child. Move  
the selected topic to another location and then  
promote it.  
l
l
If you divide a topic that has subtopics (children), the  
second half of the divided topic will become the parent  
of these subtopics. The two parts of the original topic  
remain on the same level.  
You should not attempt to join a topic with a collapsed  
topic above it. If you do, the unit will ask for  
confirmation. If you continue, it will combine the topic  
with the last topic in the preceding topic’s family. It is  
better to first expand the collapsed topic’s family in  
order to see what you are combining with.  
The Outline  
application  
menus  
Switches between single-line  
and full views of an entry (see  
p. 161).  
Displays all subtopics that  
have been collapsed (see  
p. 169).  
Collapses all subtopics (see  
p. 168).  
Combines or splits topics (see  
p. 163).  
Sets the entry as secret or  
non-secret (see p. 284).  
Selects specific text,  
topics/families, or entire  
outlines for deletion (see  
p. 166).  
171  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
172  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Desk Accessories  
The “desk accessories” are valuable utilities  
for everyday use. The (Calculator) can  
perform on-the-fly calculations on numbers  
entered from the display or copied from  
other applications. The Clock can  
simultaneously display the day, date, and  
time in two cities of your choice. And with  
the Scrapbook application, you can make a  
drawing directly on the display, copy that  
drawing to another application, or even send  
it by fax directly from the  
This chapter provides all the information you  
need to use the features in each of these  
applications.  
173  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The unit has a 1 O-digit calculator which performs  
mathematical operations, including square root and  
percentage calculation, and can also calculate duration of  
time based on a date, such as the number of days you  
have to complete a project. In addition, it has a paperless  
printer feature, which displays all calculations in a vertical  
column on the display.  
There are three different displays in the  
application,  
and the application opens with the display that was last  
used.  
Performing 1. Press  
to open the application window.  
The calculator’s key pad appears on the display.  
tions  
2. Enter the calculation by touching the key pad.  
You can also use the numeric and mathematical symbol  
keys on the keyboard.  
To quit the  
application, press any other application  
key.  
l
To clear an entered value, touch  
clear a operation, touch  
once, and to  
twice.  
l
Calculations are performed in the order of entry, not  
according to algebraic convention, i.e., 8 + 2 x 3 =  
(8 + 2) x 3, not 8 + (2 x 3).  
l
q
on the display indicates that a number is stored in  
memory. Touch twice to clear the memory.  
174  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
l
l
Press  
to erase the last digit typed.  
E on the display indicates an error. Touch  
clear the error.  
to  
l
l
Touch  
to change the sign of a displayed value.  
To perform a square root calculation using the  
keyboard, press  
(on the bottom row).  
For other calculation operations, see p. 181.  
In the basic calculator mode, only the results of a  
calculation are displayed. Using the paperless printer, you  
can retain the steps in a calculation and later edit that  
calculation. This allows you to change numbers and  
The  
less printer  
=)  
back up intermediate results  
operators  
x, ,  
within a calculation so that you do not later have to  
reenter the entire calculation.  
,
,
and  
terminate a calculation  
sequence, and a value entered following any of these  
keys begins a new calculation. Using the paperless  
printer, a calculation sequence is retained and can be  
recalled with even after the display has been  
cleared with  
until a new one is entered, or all  
steps are deleted using  
.
Up to 50 steps have been be stored for a calculation.  
(Power calculations must be carried out using multiple  
multiplication. Otherwise, the functions are the same as  
those for the basic calculator mode.)  
Performing calculations  
1. Press  
2. Touch  
to open the application.  
. Enter the calculation.  
Entered values  
The number of  
steps that have  
been entered.  
1’  
175  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
marks the starting entry. The value on the display of  
the key pad is the value you have just entered or final  
result of the calculation, as indicated by ENTRY or  
ANSWER, respectively, shown above the value.  
3. Touch  
to get the result.  
Checking intermediate results  
1. Press  
until you reach the line of the calculation  
you want to check.  
The total up to and including the highlighted line is  
displayed.  
1
-Indicates the current  
step.  
2. Touch  
once to return to the display of the final  
result, and again to clear the display.  
Inserting figures  
Move to the line before which you want to insert the new  
value.  
2. Press  
.
INSERT MODE briefly appears on the key pad’s display.  
3. Enter the operator and the value to be inserted then  
press  
The value is now included in the calculation.  
4. Press  
again to get the total.  
Once the total has been calculated the insert mode  
automatically changes to the normal entry mode. To  
return to the entry mode while editing a calculation, press  
again.  
176  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Changing part of a calculation  
1. Move to the line you want to change using  
.
2. Enter the new operator and value then press  
3. Press  
Deleting a line  
1. Move to the line you want to delete using  
again to get the new answer.  
.
2. Press  
.
3. Press  
to get the new total.  
application, you can calculate the period  
Date  
Using the  
of time (in days) between two specific dates, and also  
determine what the date will be a certain number of days  
before or after a specific date.  
calculation  
Calculating the number of days between two dates  
1. Touch  
to call the date calculator.  
The current date is the default starting date.  
If you want the calculation to start from the current date,  
skip step  
2
below.  
Starting date  
2. Touch CANCEL to clear the starting date field and enter  
the desired starting date. Prefix a single-digit month or  
date with a 0.  
You can also modify a specific part of a date by touching  
it, then entering the desired numbers.  
3. Touch  
177  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4. Enter the ending date.  
5. Touch  
The number of days between the two dates is shown.  
l
if you make a mistake, touch  
previous step.  
to return to a  
l
If you  
invalid date or other value, for example  
if you forget to enter the year, the operation will not be  
nized and nothing will happen when you touch  
Calculating a date by specifying a number of days  
1. Touch  
to call the date calculator.  
The current date is the default starting date. If you want  
to calculate a date from the current date, skip the next  
step.  
2. Touch  
to clear the starting date field and enter  
the desired starting date. Prefix a single-digit month or  
date with a 0.  
You can also modify a specific part of a date by touching  
it, then entering the desired numbers.  
3. Touch  
to obtain a date in the future, or  
for a date in the past.  
Touch  
or  
, respectively.  
4. Enter the number of days to base your calculation on.  
5. Touch  
The date is displayed.  
178  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
You can continue to calculate dates in the future or past  
using the calculated date as a new starting date; after a  
date is calculated, touch  
or  
, respectively. The  
calculated date is automatically entered in the FROM  
field. Proceed from step 4 above.  
If you make a mistake, touch  
previous step.  
to return to a  
You can perform calculations that are written out in an  
entry of any application using the application. You  
can also transfer calculated values into an entry.  
Using the  
Calculator  
with other  
applications  
From an entry to  
1. Press the application key for the entry with the data you  
want to calculate.  
2. Highlight the calculation you want to perform.  
PAGE  
1
3. Press (2nd)  
4.  
The copied calculation is performed automatically, and  
the result is displayed.  
179  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
From  
1. After a calculation, touch the value displayed in the  
window to highlight it, and press (2nd)  
to entry  
.
2. Open an entry in the Edit mode of an application and  
touch the position where you want to enter the calculated  
figure.  
3. Press (2nd) (PASTE).  
Now the copied value is included in the entry.  
When E  
appears  
When any of the following situations occur? the error  
indicator E appears. Touch  
to clear the error.  
The integer part of the calculation result is within the  
range of 11 to 20 digits (a rough calculation is obtained).  
l
Example: 4567890123  
456  
“208.2957896” is displayed with E, which  
indicates that  
208.2957896 x  
=
is the rough result.  
In the paperless printer mode, no rough calculation can  
be obtained.  
l
l
l
The integer part of the calculation result exceeds 20  
digits.  
The integer part of the numerical value in the memory  
exceeds  
digits.  
A number is divided by 0.  
180  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Calculation examples  
Display  
(answer)  
Calculation  
Arithmetic  
Example  
Operation  
1 2 x 3 + 5 =  
1 2  
2 4  
3
41.  
-8.  
(-24)  
4
2 =  
/_I 2  
Constant  
34 + 57 =  
45 + 57 =  
91.  
The addend  
= becomes a constant.  
45  
102.  
(Subtraction and division are  
performed in the same manner.)  
68 x 25 =  
68 x 40 =  
68  
25  
The multiplicand  
1,700.  
2,720.  
40  
becomes a constant.  
Percent  
What is 10% of  
200  
9
20.  
25.  
What percentage  
is 9 of  
36  
Add-on  
What results  
from a 10%  
increase of  
200  
10  
20  
220.  
400.  
( o r 2 0 0  
Discount  
What is 500 after  
a 20% discount?  
500  
(or 500  
20  
Square root  
Power  
=
2 5  
4
9 I=/  
4.  
4,096.  
0.125  
=
=
I = /  
Reciprocal  
Memory  
Clear the memory before  
performing any calculations.  
Summation  
2 5 x  
-) 84  
+)  
125.  
28.  
3
8 4  
68  
3
17  
85.  
(Total) =  
182.  
Temporary memory  
6.  
(52 35) =  
5 2  
35  
136.  
181  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The unit’s built-in clock makes it possible not only to  
know the correct time in your area, but also to know the  
time in other cities or any region around the world. The  
Clock is used as the reference time by the Calendar,  
Schedule, and To Do applications. In addition to these  
features, daylight saving time (DST) can be enabled for  
any city you designate.  
To view the Clock, simply press and hold  
Home city (see below)  
Local time  
World city (see p. 185)  
Time in the World city  
Time difference  
between Home and  
World city  
Changing  
the Home  
city  
The Home city is the city selected for the local time.  
New York City is the default Home city. To change this  
setting:  
1. Press  
and touch  
to open the TOOLS  
menu.  
2. Select SET CLOCK.  
3. Select CHANGE HOME CITY.  
A list of cities appears. The currently selected city is at  
the top of the list. The cities are listed in alphabetical  
order by country and then by city name.  
182  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4.  
Type the first letter of the name of the country where the  
city you want to select is located. (For example, if you  
wanted to select San Francisco, you would type U for  
l
to display  
United States.) Then use  
the city you want.  
ar  
Touch the desired city.  
5.  
6.  
Use  
and  
to select a city.  
If daylight saving time is currently in effect for the  
selected city, touch DST ON  
to specify this.  
This advances the Home time by one hour.  
beside the city, indicating that daylight saving  
been set.  
appears  
has  
Touch  
.
7.  
The Clock window appears briefly, indicating the new  
Home city. The time is automatically adjusted.  
l
If you have set a User city and want to select it as the  
Home city, press (SPACE) to access it (see p. 186).  
l
Certain countries will be abbreviated on the display as  
follows:  
GERMANY, F.R.  
PAPUA N.GUINEA  
TRINID. TOB.  
U.A. EMIRATES  
USA  
Federal Republic of Germany  
Papua New Guinea  
Republic of Trinidad and Tobago  
United Arab Emirates  
United States of America  
l
Country and city names in the list and the time  
differences used to adjust the clock are as of January  
183  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting the 1.  
time and  
Press  
menu.  
and touch  
to open the TOOLS  
date  
2.  
Select SET CLOCK.  
3.  
Select ADJUST TIME/DATE.  
The TIME/DATE window opens.  
The window has three fields-Home Time, Time System,  
and Home Date.  
4.  
Enter the current time and press  
or  
. Enter a  
0 before a single-digit hour or minute entry.  
5. Move to the TIME SYSTEM field. Press  
select whether you want the time shown in  
format.  
to  
or 24-hour  
Touch the desired setting.  
Move to the HOME DATE field. Enter the current month  
and day in two digits, and the year in four digits.  
You can set any date from January ist, 1901 to  
December 31 st, 2099.  
6.  
7.  
Touch  
(or  
to cancel the changes).  
The time and date are now stored.  
You can access the CHANGE HOME CITY window  
from this window by touching . Because the  
l
unit automatically adjusts the time after the Home city is  
changed, it is recommended that the Home city be  
selected before setting the time and date.  
l
Changing the setting in the TIME SYSTEM field also  
changes the time display format for all time related  
applications and functions, such as Schedule and time  
stamp.  
184  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
You can find out the time anywhere in the world using the  
Clock application, based on the difference between the  
time in the Home city and the selected region. Specifying  
a city as the World city will display the time in that city  
Checking  
the time in  
a city  
when you press and hold  
World city.  
. London is the default  
Press  
and touch  
to open the TOOLS  
1.  
menu.  
2. Select SET CLOCK.  
Select CHANGE WORLD CITY.  
3.  
A list of six cities appears. The cities in this list will be  
those that you last selected, or checked the time in. The  
currently selected World city is at the top of the list.  
4.  
l
l
If the city you want to select as your World city is on  
the list, select it and then proceed from step 7 below.  
If the city you want is not on the list, touch  
MORE CITIES .  
CHANGE  
A list of cities appears. The first three cities are User  
cities which YOU can specify (see below). As in the HOME  
185  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CITY list, all cities in this list are in alphabetical order  
according to country name.  
5.  
Type the first letter of the name of the country where the  
city you want to check the time for is located. Then use  
and  
to display the city you want.  
6.  
7.  
Select the desired city by touching it.  
If daylight saving time is currently in effect for the  
selected city, touch  
to specify this.  
appears beside the city, indicating that daylight saving  
time has been set.  
Touch  
The city is selected as the World city and the window  
closes.  
The Clock window briefly appears, indicating the time in  
the selected World city.  
You can press  
page of the list.  
at any time to return to the first  
Adding a  
User’s city  
The Clock application lets you register your own cities,  
called “User cities,” and designate them as the Home and  
World cities.  
1.  
Press  
and touch  
to open the TOOLS  
menu.  
2.  
3.  
Select SET CLOCK.  
Select ADD USER’S CITY.  
The USER’S CITY window opens.  
ADO USER' S CI TY  
USER CITY1  
YORK  
COUNTRY  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
- .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
"
. i --. -5. .  
. GMT .  
. . [ . h. our. s. ].  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
US.ER CI. TY2  
. CI TY2.  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. COUNTRY .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
"
.
. GMT.  
. [ hour s ]  
.
.
.
.
.
.
"
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
"
.
.
.
.
_.  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
_.  
"
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
CI TY3  
USER CI TY3  
186  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
You can set up to three cities by entering information in  
the three fields. In the unit’s default settings, New York  
has been designated as USER  
Move to the field you would like to change-USER  
2, or 3.  
4.  
5. Press lo>  
to delete the current setting and  
enter the name of your desired city.  
6. Move to the COUNTRY field.  
7.  
Delete the current setting and enter the name of the  
country where the city is located.  
8. Move to the GMT (Greenwich Mean Time) field.  
Enter the time difference between your city and  
9.  
Greenwich Mean Time (the international time reference).  
Press  
before a number for a negative time  
difference. You can specify any value from -11.5 to  
with 0.5 hour precision.  
2
Touch  
10.  
The city you entered is set as a User city, and is listed on  
the first page on both the Home and World city lists.  
To select the User city you have just entered as the  
Home or World city, see p. 182 or p. 185, respectively.  
Assigning DST to a city  
Daylight  
saving time  
Designating daylight saving time for a city automatically  
sets the time for that city one hour ahead.  
This can be done using either the Home city or World city  
list, accessed from the menu.  
1.  
Press  
touch  
and select SET CLOCK.  
2. Select either CHANGE HOME CITY or CHANGE  
WORLD CITY.  
Bring the desired city to the display using  
, then select it.  
and  
3.  
4. Touch DST ON  
OFF  
187  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
appears to the left of the city, indicating that DST has  
been assigned to it.  
Touch  
5.  
To unassign a city’s DST setting, simply follow the above  
procedure and touch  
again (the button  
toggles between on and off).  
Enabling and disabling DST  
Once DST is assigned to a city, it remains in effect until it  
is unassigned. Once a year cities using DST will switch  
back to regular time. Rather than having to unassign DST  
for each city, you can temporarily disable the entire DST  
feature. Then when these cities switch back to DST, you  
can reenable the feature.  
1.  
Press  
and touch  
to open the TOOLS  
menu.  
2.  
3.  
Select SET CLOCK.  
The current DST setting (enabled or disabled) is indicated  
by an asterisk. To enable DST on all cities for which it is  
assigned, select ENABLE DST. To disable DST on these  
cities, select DISABLE DST.  
Setting daily  
alarms  
You can set alarms just like on a regular clock, separately  
from Schedule events, using the TOOLS menu. Set  
alarms will sound even if the Organizer is turned off.  
This can be especially convenient, for example, when you  
need an alarm as a reminder or to wake you up, but do  
not want to make a full Schedule entry.  
From any application,  
1. Press  
and touch  
to open the TOOLS  
menu and select SET DAILY ALARMS.  
The SET DAILY ALARMS window opens. You can set up  
to seven alarms.  
188  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DAI LY ALARM  
. ALARM .  
UNSET  
:
.
.
.UNSET  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. . DAILY. . ALARM .  
UNSET  
:
" . . . I  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
2. Enter the time that you would like an alarm to go off,  
followed by or (PM).  
3. Touch SET-UNSET ALARM to set the alarm.  
Press (2nd)  
.
4. Move to the next field and set any alarms you want to set  
using this procedure.  
5. Touch  
(or  
to cancel the setting).  
Turning alarms on and off  
To turn off an alarm that is sounding, press  
Alarms  
will turn off automatically after sounding for 15 seconds.  
To unset an alarm, select SET DAILY ALARMS from the  
TOOLS menu, select the alarm you want to turn off, and  
touch  
ALARM (alarms are indicated as set  
or unset in the display’s middle field).  
You can also press  
desired alarm.  
after selecting the  
Disabling all alarm sounds  
Once you have set an alarm, it will sound at the  
appropriate time whether the unit is on or off. When the  
unit is on, at the right side of the display indicates that  
any alarm that is set will sound.  
There may be times when you do not want to hear any of  
the set alarms. You can disable all Schedule and Daily  
alarms at once.  
1. Press  
and touch  
189  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
To open the second tools menu, touch MORE TOOLS  
and select ENABLE/DISABLE ALARM.  
The ENABLE/DISABLE  
submenu opens. The  
setting in effect is indicated by an asterisk.  
2. Select DISABLE ALL ALARMS.  
disappears from the display. All alarms are turned off,  
i.e. no audible alarm will sound, until you use the above  
procedure to turn them on again by selecting ENABLE  
ALL ALARMS. However, the display will still indicate  
when each alarm reaches its set time, even when the unit  
is turned off.  
You can also press  
I,) to enable/disable all  
alarms.  
The unit’s Scrapbook makes it possible to draw maps,  
create illustrations, or make a quick note by writing  
directly on the display. The drawings can then be pasted  
into entries in the Tel and User File applications, and  
become part of those databases (see p. 126).  
Graphic entries take up a lot more space in the unit’s  
memory than text entries, so it is a good idea to delete  
those graphic entries you do not need, or copy them to a  
RAM memory card.  
190  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
General operations for graphic entries using the  
Scrapbook application were introduced in Chapter 2.  
If you want to review those operations, turn to page 77.  
Making  
1. Press [SCRAPBOOK) to open the application.  
new entries  
A “blank page” opens.  
Please begin dr a wi ng  
pa ge . . .  
t o view ot he r pa ge s .  
2. Using the touch pen, start writing whatever you would like  
directly on the display.  
The page automatically changes to the “drawing page.”  
THICK is the default drawing tool (for an explanation of  
drawing tools, see below).  
Press (ENTER) .  
Your drawing is now stored, and the display changes to  
the viewing page.  
4. Touch  
to make another entry, or press any other  
application key to close the Scrapbook.  
191  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The drawing tools add versatility and capability to  
creating graphics with the unit. The tools are selected  
from the MODIFY menu.  
Using the  
drawing  
Press  
and touch  
The MODIFY menu appears.  
Selects thin, thick, or “brush”  
drawing strokes.  
Selects a thin or thick eraser.  
Selects a black, gray, or white line  
pattern (white is equivalent to an  
r
eraser).  
E R AS E R T H I C K N ES S  
-
PATTERN  
drawn lines to straight (ruler  
on) or freestyle (ruler off).  
L-Default drawing setting.  
Converts the touch pen to an  
eraser.  
I USE ERASER  
areas to cut, copy, paste or  
delete.  
Deletes a selected area, single  
entry, or all Scrapbook entries.  
indicates that there is a submenu  
for the menu item.  
Finding  
entries  
Entries are saved in the order that they are stored, and  
are displayed using  
or (NEXT) from the initial  
blank page screen.  
Display the entry you want to revise using the procedure  
above.  
Editing  
entries  
1.  
2 .  
Touch  
.
The drawing page is displayed.  
3 .  
Make any desired changes.  
Press  
The revised drawing is now stored.  
Selecting  
an area  
You can select a section of a drawing for copying,  
deleting, and other operations.  
1.  
Make sure you are on the drawing page. Press  
touch  
and select USE AREA TOOLS.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2.  
Draw a line to select the area you want.  
You select an area by drawing a line diagonally across it.  
The unit  
the line as a diagonal and places a  
rectangular box around it, which marks the area for an  
operation.  
Indicates the  
selected area.  
3. Proceed to the sections below corresponding to the  
operation you want to perform on the selected area.  
To deselect an area, simply touch anywhere in the  
drawing area.  
4.  
When you have finished working with a selected area,  
open the MODIFY menu and select USE PEN (or USE  
ERASER) to quit the area operation and continue working  
with the picture, or press (ENTER) to store the picture.  
Moving or  
copying  
You can move or copy sections of graphic entries only  
within the Scrapbook application.  
sections  
of graphic  
entries  
1.  
2.  
Select the area to be moved or copied to another location.  
Press  
to move or (2nd)  
to copy.  
3. Select the area you want to move or copy the drawing to.  
193  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4. Press (2nd) (PASTE) .  
You cannot reduce or enlarge an area of graphics. No  
matter what size area you select to paste to, the  
cut/copied graphics (or a part thereof) will be reproduced  
at the same size as the original.  
To move or copy an entire area of graphics, see p. 130 or  
p. 209.  
Deleting sections of graphic entries  
1. Select the area you want to delete.  
2. Press  
.
You can import text from other applications to the  
Scrapbook.  
Adding text  
strings to  
graphic  
1. Display the entry that you want to import text from in the  
entries  
View mode.  
2. Copy the desired text by using (2nd)  
.
or  
3. Press  
4. Display an existing drawing and touch  
drawing to make a new entry.  
, or begin  
5. Select the area where you want to place the text.  
194  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6. Press (2nd)  
.
The text is reproduced so that it fits in the area you  
specify with lines of text split over several lines if  
necessary.  
If the specified area is not big enough to contain the  
entire cut/copied text, only part of it will be pasted.  
Deleting single entries  
Deleting  
entries  
1. Display the drawing you want to delete in the viewing  
2. Press  
.
A warning message appears asking if you are sure you  
want to delete the entry.  
3. Touch  
(or  
to cancel the deletion).  
Deleting all entries  
In any application,  
1. Press  
touch and select DATA  
DELETION.  
195  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The DATA DELETION submenu appears.  
2. Select ALL SCRAPBOOK DATA.  
A warning message appears asking if you are sure you  
want to delete all the Scrapbook entries.  
3. Touch  
(or  
to cancel the deletion).  
The  
Scrapbook  
application  
(VIEWS)  
menu  
Displays the first Scrapbook entry.  
F I RST ENTRY  
LAST ENTRY  
FAX SEND  
Displays the last Scrapbook entry.  
Sends a fax of the currently  
displayed picture. (Sharp CE-FM1  
fax/modem and  
37T level  
converter must be connected.)  
196  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Features and Utilities for Added  
Power  
In addition to its basic features, the unit also  
provides an array of utilities that gives you  
even greater control over your information.  
This chapter introduces and explains those  
features, from cut, copy, and paste, to filing,  
filtering selected entries, and more. Not  
everyone will need to use all of these  
features on a daily basis-pick and choose  
from among them to find those that suit the  
job at hand and your own working style.  
In general, all of the unit’s applications  
share the features explained in this chapter.  
Exceptions are noted.  
197  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
This unique and easy-to-use application allows you to  
manage your information by topics rather than by type of  
entry. Using Filer folders, you can organize information  
the same way as you would in your office. For example,  
suppose you have a project called “Andromeda”. In your  
unit you might have the names and phone numbers of  
three personnel involved in the project stored in one of  
the Tel files, two pages of meeting notes in the Notebook  
application, one outline describing the project in the  
Outline application, three action items in the To Do  
application, and five Andromeda meetings in the  
Schedule application. With the Filer, you can assign all  
entries related to the Andromeda project to a single  
folder, then simply select the folder when you want to  
carry out an operation such as view, print, transfer, FAX,  
delete, etc. This makes it possible to manage all entries  
related to the project as a single folder.  
Press  
to open the application.  
folder  
Entries received  
from another unit,  
E-mail, etc., will be  
assigned to this  
folder. (See  
p. 244, p. 248 and  
p. 267.)  
r
Name  
labels  
Blank name labels  
indicate the empty  
folders.  
Filer Drawer example  
The Filer Drawer is the initial display in the Filer  
application, from which you can manage folders and  
perform various  
on them.  
Before you can use this convenient application, you must  
first assign the entries to folders.  
198  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
There are two ways of assigning entries to a folder: you  
can assign a group of entries to one folder, or you can  
assign individual entries to one or more folders. No  
matter which type you decide to use, the entries  
themselves are not moved to or stored in the folder, they  
are simply assigned to it; the entries are retained in the  
applications that created them.  
Assigning  
entries to  
folders  
Assigning related entries to one folder  
You can assign groups of entries linked by a common  
keyword to a specified folder using  
. This  
function also lets you select which applications to search  
for entries containing the keyword.  
ic  
1. Press [FILER) to open the appl  
2. Touch a name label to select the folder that you want to  
assign the entries to.  
You can also use the cursor keys to select a folder.  
3. Touch  
.
The COLLECT ENTRIES window opens.  
Collect all e n t r i e s  
199  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
l
If you select a folder that already contains entries and  
touch  
proceed, the  
, a message indicates that if you  
entries will be unassi ned from  
that folder. Touch  
to proceed (or  
to cancel  
the selection and choose another folder).  
l
You may notice that buttons for some applications are  
missing from the COLLECT ENTRIES window. It is not  
possible to create entries in the Calendar,  
and  
Clock application windows, so these applications are  
not included. Graphic entries cannot be assigned to  
folders, so the Scrapbook is also not included.  
4. Enter a keyword up to 16 characters long. Letters,  
numbers, and symbols can all be used. (The unit does  
not distinguish between upper- and lower-case letters.)  
l
Touch the SECRET ONLY box to collect on/y secret  
entries. (This box will not be displayed if the unit is  
locked.) Entering a keyword is optional in this case.  
(Touch the box again to deselect it.)  
5. Since all the applications are selected by default, touch  
the buttons to deselect any applications you do not want  
to collect entries from.  
COLLECT ENTRI ES  
again to  
6. Touch  
in the window.  
A “Collecting” message appears. If there are no entries  
containing the keyword, a message indicates this. You  
may want to try again using a different keyword, or touch  
to close the box.  
All entries containing the keyword are assigned to the  
specified folder. The first ten characters of the keyword  
200  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
are displayed as the name of the folder (or UNTITLED is  
displayed if you collected secret entries without specifying  
a keyword).  
You can easily change the name as you like. See p. 202,  
“Naming or renaming folders”.  
Assigning a single entry to folders  
1. Display the entry that you want to assign to a folder in the  
View mode of its application.  
2. Touch  
.
A window opens.  
FILE IT  
3. Touch as many folders as you want to assign the entry to.  
(Touch a folder again to deselect it.)  
4. Touch  
.
A “Filed!” message is displayed and the View mode  
reappears.  
201  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The entry is appended to any existing entries  
selected folder(s).  
I
n the  
If you select an empty folder to assign an ent  
to, the  
first ten characters of the contents of the first text field of  
the entry are shown on the name label.  
You can easily change the name as you like. See the  
following section, “Naming or renaming folders.”  
Naming or 1. In the Filer Drawer, touch the name label to select any  
renaming  
folders  
folder (except the IN folder) that you would like to name  
or rename.  
You can also use the cursor keys to select a folder.  
2. Press (EDIT),  
The EDIT FOLDER NAME window opens.  
EDIT FOLDER NAME  
3. Enter any name up to ten characters long that you would  
like to use for the folder. Letters, numbers, and symbols  
can all be used.  
When renaming, first press  
to delete the  
existing name.  
4. Touch  
to register the name (or to  
cancel it).  
The name you entered appears on the name label.  
You can also name a folder using the MODIFY menu. In  
step 2, select EDIT FOLDER NAME from the menu.  
202  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Viewing  
entries via  
the Filer  
Once an entry has been assigned to a folder, it can be  
easily accessed using the Filer. The advantage to  
accessing information via the Filer is that you can browse  
through your information by topic rather than by  
application.  
1. Press  
and go to the Filer Drawer display if it  
does not appear.  
2. Select the folder containing the entries that you want to  
see then touch  
at a time.)  
(Only one folder can be opened  
Touch the folder twice.  
Entries in the folder are displayed in the Filer Index.  
r
Sales Meeting a-  
__  
__ __ . .  
.
. . .  
Sales  
. .s. . Fi gur e  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Entries in a folder are sorted by application.  
If there are more than eight entries assigned to the folder,  
press  
or  
to display additional entries.  
3. Select the entry you want to view in detail, then touch  
.
Touch the entry twice.  
The entry now appears in the View mode of its  
application.  
4. Press  
5. Touch  
to return to the Filer Index.  
to return to the Filer Drawer.  
Touch the folder’s name label.  
203  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Editing and deleting assigned entries  
Once an entry has been assigned to a Filer folder or  
folders, any changes made to the entry in its application  
will be reflected in all relevant folders.  
Before an entry can be edited or deleted, its application  
must be opened.  
1.  
Open the desired folder.  
2. Select the entry you want to edit or delete then touch  
.
Perform the desired operation.  
3.  
4.  
Press  
when you have finished to return to the  
Filer Index.  
l
It is not possible to create a new entry in the Filer  
application. New entries must be created in individual  
applications.  
l
Deletion of single entries can only be done in the  
individual applications. However, you can delete all  
entries in a folder using the Filer application (see p.  
206).  
Unassigning single entries from folders  
Unassigning  
entries from  
folders  
If you assign an entry into the wrong folder, or no longer  
ned to a folder, you can  
need a particular entry assi  
unassign it using REMOV  
Select the folder in the Filer Drawer that contains the  
entry that you want to unassign.  
1.  
Touch  
2.  
If the desired entry is not displayed, press  
appears.  
until it  
Select the entry that you want to remove.  
3.  
4. Touch  
.
Since the entry is not deleted from the unit, there is no  
user message asking you to confirm the operation. The  
entry is unassigned from the folder.  
204  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5. Touch  
to return to the Filer Drawer.  
Unassigning all entries from a folder  
You can easily unassign all of the entries assigned to a  
folder using the application menu.  
1. In the Filer Drawer, select the folder you want to empty.  
2. Press  
touch  
and select EMPTY  
THIS FOLDER.  
A message appears to confirm that you want to unassign  
everything in the folder.  
3. Touch  
to empty the folder (or  
to cancel the  
operation).  
The name label is now blank, indicating an empty folder.  
At times, you may find two folders whose contents,  
names, or purpose are duplicated. Or you may find that  
you want to move or combine the contents of two folders  
into a single folder. This is easy to do on the unit.  
Combining a folder that has been named with an empty,  
unnamed folder results in “moving.”  
Merging  
folders  
Combining a folder that has been named with another  
named folder results in “merging” (even if UNTITLED is  
the name of one or both files).  
1. Select the folder in the Filer Drawer that you want to  
merge with another folder.  
2. Touch  
“MERGE 2 FOLDERS” is displayed.  
205  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3. Select the folder that you want to merge the first folder  
with (destination folder).  
The contents of the first selected folder are appended to  
the destination folder. When merging folders, the name of  
the destination folder has priority. If there are duplicates  
of the contents in folders being merged, one of the  
duplicates is automatically deleted.  
4. Touch  
(or  
to cancel the procedure).  
The folders are now merged and the Filer Drawer  
appears.  
Deleting all  
entries in a  
folder  
Deleting all entries from a folder deletes them completely  
from the unit.  
1. Press  
.
2. Select the folder in the Filer Drawer containing the entries  
that you want to delete. (Only one folder can be selected  
at a time.)  
3. Press  
touch  
and select DELETE  
FOLDER CONTENTS.  
A warning message appears asking if you are sure you  
want to delete all the entries in the folder.  
4. Touch  
(or  
to cancel the deletion).  
It is not possible to delete all entries simultaneously, if the  
unit is locked. See p. 282.  
You can send (via infrared) all entries assigned to a  
Sharing  
folders  
particular folder to another  
series unit.  
1. Press  
2. Press  
on the receiving unit.  
on the sending unit.  
3. Reverse a folder in the Filer Drawer and press  
.
All entries assigned to the selected folder will be  
transmitted to the receiving unit. All entries will be  
automatically assigned to the receiving unit’s IN folder.  
206  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
See page 248 for more information about unit to unit  
transfers.  
The Filer  
application  
menus  
EDIT FOLDER NAME  
EMPTY THIS FOLDER  
DELETE FOLDER CONTENTS  
Copying or Moving a Block of Text  
The unit lets you cut, copy, or paste blocks of text or  
selected areas of graphic images, using the application  
menu. The first step in cutting, copying, and pasting is to  
select the block of text or the area of the graphic you  
want to work with.  
Text or a graphic that has been cut or copied is stored on  
the unit’s internal “clipboard.” Only one block of text or  
graphic can be stored in the clipboard at a time, and it  
will remain there until a new block of text or graphic is cut  
or copied. There is no limit to the number of times you  
can paste text or graphics from the clipboard.  
You can copy or move blocks of text in virtually any  
application.  
For a full explanation of using CUT/COPY/PASTE with  
graphics, see p. 193.  
1. Select an entry in the Index mode or display it in the View  
mode of an application and press  
The entry opens in the Edit mode.  
207  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2. Drag the touch pen from the beginning to the end of the  
text that you want to move or copy.  
3. Press  
(CUT) if you want to delete the selected text  
so that it can be pasted to a new location.  
Press  
(copy! if you want to make a copy of the  
text (and leave the original unchanged).  
The text is copied in the clipboard.  
4. Touch  
if you want to store the original entry  
to discard all the  
with any changes, or touch  
changes you have made to the original entry, including  
text cutting.  
5. Move the cursor to the location where you want to place  
the text, either within the same entry or in another entry.  
6. Press (2nd)  
The text you selected is now moved or copied to the new  
location.  
7. Touch /STORE] to store the moved or copied text in its  
new location.  
l
Pasted text is inserted into existing text regardless of  
whether the insertion or overwriting mode is selected.  
By highlighting the text before  
is  
pressed, however, it can be replaced with the pasted  
text.  
l
Only numbers and operators can be pasted to and from  
the  
ignored. Pasted calculations can then be performed in  
the application.  
application. Any text that is pasted will be  
l
A block of text can also be copied (but not cut) from an  
entry opened in the View mode.  
208  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Copying or Moving Entries  
The CUT/COPY/PASTE function provides a quick,  
convenient way for you to copy or move an entire entry to  
another location. Entries do not have to be in the same  
file or even in the same application-CUT/COPY/PASTE  
works across virtually all applications including those on a  
RAM card. Graphic entries, however, can be copied or  
moved only within the Scrapbook or to a picture field in a  
Tel or User File entry, or to the start-up display.  
1.  
2.  
Display an entry that you want to copy or move in the  
View mode, or select it in the Index mode.  
Press (2nd)  
message will ask if you are sure you want to delete the  
entry from its present location. Touch to proceed  
if you want to move the entry. A  
(or  
to cancel the operation).  
Press  
if you want to make a copy of the  
entry.  
3. Press  
in the application you want to move or  
copy the entry to. You can also append the copied/cut  
entry to an existing entry. Open an entry in the Edit  
mode, and move the cursor to the position where you  
want to append the entry.  
4. Press (2nd)  
5. Make any necessary changes to the moved/copied entry.  
Touch  
when you have finished to store the  
entry.  
The entry you selected is now moved or copied to the  
new location.  
l
In the View mode in the Outline application, to copy or  
move an entire outline, you must first select its title.  
If you select a topic in the outline, only the selected  
topic and its subtopics will be copied.  
l
Scrapbook entries can only be pasted within the  
picture field of a Tel  
aoolication or into the  
209  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
or User File entry (see p.  
display (see p. 280). Pasting Scrapbook entries in any  
other place only displays there.  
or to the start-up  
l
Only text data can be moved/copied from a Notebook  
entry to another application. The format in which the  
entry was stored is not reproduced. Additionally, if a  
tab is included in the original entry, any subsequent text  
will not be pasted.  
l
Indents and page format settings in a Notebook entry  
will not be moved/copied, even if it is pasted within the  
same application.  
Creating a New Entry Based on an Existing One  
You may sometimes find it convenient or necessary to  
make changes to an entry without losing any of the  
information in the original entry in order to make a new  
entry that is very similar to a previous one.  
In the Notebook application, for example, you may want  
to make a copy of a business letter so you can use the  
format in another letter.  
By using (2nd)  
, you can edit or change an entry,  
then store those changes in a new entry, ensuring that  
information in the old entry remains intact.  
1.  
Recall an entry and make any changes to it that you  
would like in the Edit mode.  
2. Press  
The edited entry is now stored as a new entry, and the  
original remains unchanged.  
In the Notebook application, you will be asked under  
should be stored. Enter the  
l
which title the new ent  
new title and touch . If you use the same title  
as for the original entry, you will have duplicate titles for  
entries with different contents.  
. Pressing the (2nd) (EDIT) stores an entry as a copy so  
that you can save the original entry and edit the  
duplicated entry.  
210  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The Time Stamp and Date Stamp Functions  
The time and date stamp functions can be used to insert  
or “stamp” the current time and date anywhere in an  
entry, including time/date fields in applications such as  
Schedule and To Do. This is very convenient for keeping  
track of such things as telephone conversations or when  
tracking expenses.  
1. When working in the Edit mode of an application, place  
the cursor at the location where you want to insert the  
time or date.  
2. Press (2nd)  
to insert the time, or (2nd)  
[DATE STAMP) to insert the date, or both. When you store  
the entry, the time and date stamps will be stored with it.  
FAX  
123 Main  
1
NJ  
l
l
Time and date stamps inserted into an entry are  
included in any printout of the entry.  
You cannot stamp a Scrapbook entry with the time or  
date.  
The Word Key  
You may sometimes find yourself having to enter the  
same word over and over again-in lists, for example-or  
you may have several memos or letters you have to write  
that are all on the same topic. Using the  
key,  
211  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
you can easily insert words, numbers, and phrases (up to  
32 characters long) in an entry with the press of a key.  
Registering  
your words  
or phrases  
There are no default words assigned to the unit’s  
key, so to use the key you must first register  
your words or phrases.  
1. Press  
and touch  
to open the TOOLS  
menu. Select MORE TOOLS and then select SET UP  
WORD KEY.  
A list appears-now blank-which you will use to assign  
words to the Word key.  
2 . T o u c h ( A D D ] .  
A NEW WORD window opens.  
3. Enter any word, number, or phrase (up to 32 characters)  
that you want to be able to recall using  
4. Touch  
5. Repeat steps 2 to 4 above to register any other words  
you might like to insert into a document using  
Words are registered and sorted alphabetically.  
6. Touch  
when you are finished.  
212  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Inserting a 1. When entering or editing an entry in the Edit mode, place  
the cursor where you want to enter a word.  
word or  
phrase  
with the  
Word key  
Press  
.
The RECALL WORD window opens, showing an  
alphabetical list of the words you have registered.  
or  
Select the word you want to insert. Touch  
to bring up more words if necessary.  
3.  
4. Touch  
The window closes and the word is inserted in the entry  
at the cursor position.  
Touching a word twice in step 3 above also inserts it into  
an entry.  
You can edit a word or phrase using basically the same  
procedure for adding a word or phrase (see above), but  
instead of touching [ADD WORD] in the SET UP WORD  
KEY window, select the word you want to edit and touch  
. An EDIT WORD window opens. Make  
Editing a  
word or  
phrase  
any desired changes and touch  
CANCEL] to close the window.  
. Then touch  
Deleting a  
word or  
phrase  
If you find that you no longer need a particular word or  
phrase, it is easy to delete it. Select SET UP WORD KEY  
from the TOOLS menu, select the word or phrase you  
want to delete, and press  
. A warning message  
appears asking if you are sure you want to delete the  
selection. Touch  
Then touch  
(or  
to cancel the deletion).  
to close the window.  
The Filter Function  
The unit’s Filter function allows you to focus only on  
entries containing specified information in an application.  
For example, you could recall all the entries pertaining to  
a specific company. The Filter function does this by  
all entries that do not match  
criteria from  
213  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
all the display modes of an application until the function  
turned off.  
You can edit or view the displayed entries normally while  
the Filter is turned on.  
The Filter function is available only in the Schedule, Tel,  
and User File applications.  
Turning  
the Filter  
on  
Open the application-Schedule, Tel, or User  
File-containing the entries you want to work with. Go to  
the Index or View mode.  
2. Press  
ON/OFF.  
touch  
and select FILTER  
A submenu appears.  
3. Select TURN ON FILTER.  
l
In the Tel and User File applications, a display similar  
to the Edit mode opens.  
l
In the Schedule application,  
window  
a
opens as shown  
below.  
4.  
Touch the SECRET ONLY box to extract secret entries  
only (see p. 282). (This box will not be displayed if the  
unit is locked.) You can extract all the secret entries in  
the application by skipping step 5 below.  
(Touch the button again to deselect the feature.)  
214  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5. Type the keyword(s) you want to use as a filter. In the  
Schedule, keyword(s) must be those that appear in the  
DESCRIPTION field.  
In the Tel and User File, enter keywords in as many-or  
as few-fields as you want. However, in picture fields,  
indicated by “[PICTURE],” you cannot enter anything.  
The more keywords you enter, the more selective the  
filtering process will be.  
6. Touch  
The filtering process begins and an Index page appears  
with the first entry that matches your criteria.  
If no matching entries are found, a message indicates this.  
If a new entry is made or an entry is transferred from  
another device when the Filter function is on, the entry  
be displayed even though it may not meet the criteria.  
If you want to remove these new entries, you will have to  
turn the Filter function off then repeat the above  
procedure.  
Turning the  
Filter off  
To turn off the Filter function, simply touch  
TURN OFF FILTER on the display or select TURN OFF  
FILTER from the FILTER ON/OFF submenu.  
The Filter function also makes it possible to delete a  
group of entries related to one or several topics. This can  
be extremely helpful, for example, if you complete a  
project that has several entries relating to it, saving you  
time by deleting them as a group instead of one by one.  
Deleting  
filtered  
entries  
In the Schedule, Tel, or User File application,  
1. Turn on the Filter using keywords to collect the entries  
you want to delete.  
2. Press  
touch  
and select DATA  
DELETION.  
A submenu appears.  
3. Select FILTERED ENTRIES.  
215  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
A message appears asking if you want to delete all  
filtered entries in the application.  
4. Touch  
(or  
to cancel the procedure).  
All the filtered entries are deleted and the Filter function  
is turned off.  
Special Characters  
The unit has a seventeen-page menu containing 136  
symbols and accented characters, such as i, and  
plus one page for 8 often-used symbols. These symbols  
and accented characters can be easily accessed and  
inserted into an entry. Selecting any of these special  
characters inserts it at the cursor location.  
1. When entering data or editing an entry in the Edit mode,  
position the cursor where you want to insert a symbol or  
special character.  
2. Press  
on the keyboard.  
The Symbol menu appears.  
3. Press  
or  
until you find the character you  
want to enter (there are 18 menu pages to look through).  
4. Touch the desired symbol to select it.  
The symbol menu closes and the selected character is  
entered at the current cursor position.  
216  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5. If the symbol you just selected is an accent mark ( , ,  
A 0  
or  
it will flash on the display. Type the letter  
want to enter with that accent mark.  
When you next open the Symbol menu, the character  
you selected is at the top of the first page. The unit  
automatically registers the 8 characters most recently  
selected from the Symbol menu in its first page, making  
it easy to quickly access characters that you use  
frequently.  
When printing an entry, depending on your printer’s  
capability, some selected symbols and characters may  
not be printed (consult your printer manual).  
You can use the following keyboard shortcuts:  
Keyboard shortcut  
Accent  
(followed by the desired letter)  
shortcut  
Keyboard  
Special  
character/  
symbol  
217  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
218  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Your unit is a powerful pocket-size computer  
with self-contained functions that make it  
possible to accomplish a broad range of  
tasks, including printing. It has the flexibility  
to connect to other units and transfer data to  
desktop computers using the  
telecommunications functions, which are  
accessed through the PERIPHERALS  
menu. In addition, faxes can be sent from  
the Notebook, Scrapbook, and Filer  
applications. This chapter provides the  
explanations and examples to get you up  
and running with these features.  
219  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The Peripherals Menu  
PRI NT  
PC LINK MODE  
TERMI NAL MODE  
Terminal  
UNIT TO UNIT TRANSFER  
CARD TRANSFER  
L
SETTINGS  
SET PRINTER PATH  
SET PRINTER EMULATION  
SET PC LINK PATH  
SET UNIT TO UNIT PATH  
SET FA% OPTIONS  
PERIPHERALS  
Application  
Cards  
Many application cards are available as options for the  
unit, as well as RAM cards to add extra memory. Simply  
press  
to access the function of an installed IC  
card.  
The cards can be operated by touching the card keypad  
that appears on the display.  
There are some restrictions when using IC cards  
formatted for units other than  
274).  
series. (see p.  
Installing  
1. Turn the unit off.  
2. Close the unit and turn it over.  
220  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3. Set the IC card lock switch to the RELEASE position,  
(a red bar can be seen in the RELEASE position.)  
4. Slide the IC card eject switch and remove the protection  
card.  
5. Insert the card all the way into the card slot, with the  
back of the card facing up.  
6. Set the IC card lock switch to the LOCK position.  
The unit will not turn on if the IC card lock switch is in  
the RELEASE position.  
Store the protection card in a safe place and be sure to  
put it back into the unit when there is no card  
installed.  
If the battery of an installed card is depleted, a  
message indicating this will appear. Turn the unit off  
immediately and replace the card battery as soon as  
possible (leaving the card locked in the unit) to avoid  
losing data. Refer to the card manual for more  
information.  
If a message indicating a problem with card memory  
appears, touch  
to continue, clearing the  
card memory.  
221  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
For a full explanation of using the unit with a RAM card,  
see 238.  
Printing from the unit  
You have great flexibility in what you can print out from  
the unit-from what is currently on the display to single  
entries to all of the entries in an application. The range of  
printing options depends on the particular application you  
are printing from.  
Entries and information can be printed on any standard  
parallel PC printer connected to the unit via the optional  
wireless interface. The unit has built-in printer  
drivers (a printer driver is software that instructs the  
printer how to format and print data) for the following  
printers:  
l
l
l
l
Canon  
Series  
Epson FX-80, FX-850 and LQ Series  
Hewlett Packard LaserJet II and III Series  
IBM Proprinter Series  
The unit also works with printers that have an emulation  
mode for any of the above printers (consult your printer’s  
manual regarding the emulation modes it supports). For  
information about other specific models supported by the  
unit, consult your local SHARP dealer.  
l
Data may not be printed exactly the same as originally  
set in the unit if the printer being used does not support  
the settings which were made (italics set in the  
Notebook application, etc.).  
The following restrictions also apply:  
LaserJet Series:  
Text set for ELITE or PS in a Notebook entry may  
not be printed properly using this model. (In the  
LaserJet III, ELITE is available). In this case, select  
PICA. No optional font from either printer can be used.  
Proprinter Series:  
The unit supports the Proprinter  
Printers that  
emulate other Proprinter models may not function  
222  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
properly.  
FX Series:  
The unit supports the FX-80 and FX-850.  
LQ Series:  
The unit supports the LQ-510.  
l
To print from the unit to a printer, the optional SHARP  
CE-IRI wireless interface, as well as a standard  
computer printer cable, is required. See the operation  
manual for the CE-IRI regarding use with a printer.  
l
Hardware compatibility between the printer and the  
CE-IRI may affect printing capability.  
Setting  
up the  
1. Press  
and then touch PERIPHERALS to open  
the PERIPHERALS menu.  
unit for  
printing  
2. Select GLOBAL SETTINGS.  
The submenu appears.  
3. Select SET PRINTER EMULATION.  
The emulation menu appears.  
4. Select your printer type or one that your printer emulates  
223  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
(see your printer’s manual regarding the emulation modes  
it supports).  
If your printer does not support any of the printer models  
listed, touch MORE EMULATIONS and select OTHER  
(US CHARACTERS) to print U.S. character codes or  
OTHER (INTERNATIONAL) to print other character code  
sets. The “OTHER” settings make use of the unit’s  
“all-purpose” printer driver. Only text can be printed;  
graphic images cannot. In addition, because of the way in  
which code sent by the unit is converted to characters on  
the printer, information in the final printed copy may not  
appear exactly as on the unit.  
l
The SET PRINTER PATH feature in the GLOBAL  
menu lets you set the printer path before  
printing, which tells the unit how data is to be sent to a  
printer. VIA INFRARED PORT is the default setting.  
While VIA DIRECT CABLE and VIA OTHER are also  
listed under the SET PRINTER PATH submenu, these  
features are for possible future peripherals-they have  
no current function-so it is not necessary to change  
from the default VIA INFRARED PORT setting.  
l
l
To cancel printing, press  
are inoperative.  
other key operations  
To print secret entries, the unit must first be unlocked  
(see p. 278). If you try to print a group of entries or all  
entries when the unit is locked, only the non-secret  
entries will be printed.  
l
l
Entries are printed in the same format as for their View  
mode. For example, a collapsed Outline entry would be  
printed without its hidden subtopics, etc.  
When printing graphics, if there is a transfer problem or  
the print job is  
while it is in progress, for  
example, the printer might not function properly until it  
is turned off and turned on again.  
Printing the  
current  
display  
Virtually any display on the unit can be printed as it  
appears. Exceptions to this are confirmation prompt  
(Yes/No) displays, messages, etc. Printing of graphic  
224  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
images also depends on your printer’s capabilities.  
Open the display that you want to print.  
1.  
2. Press  
Press  
at any time to cancel printing.  
Printing a 1. Select the entry that you want to print in the Index mode  
or display it in the View mode.  
single entry  
Press  
2.  
Press ION) at any time to cancel printing.  
If you are in an application other than Notebook or  
Outline, you have to remove the paper manually after  
printing. If you are using the Hewlett Packard LaserJet  
Series printer, the paper will exit automatically after  
printing.  
You can also print single entries using the  
PERIPHERALS menu. After selecting or displaying the  
entry, select PRINT from the menu, then THE  
SELECTED ENTRY (or THE SELECTED OUTLINE) from  
the submenu.  
In the To Do, Schedule, Tel, and User File applications,  
and in the Filer, you can print only those entries that  
match specific criteria.  
The procedure for specifying and printing a group of  
entries varies according to the application.  
Printing a  
specified  
group of  
entries  
In the To Do application  
1.  
Go to VIEWS menu and select the file-TO BE DONE,  
DONE ENTRIES, MONTHLY GOALS, or a  
category-containing the entries you want to print.  
2. Press  
3. Select ALL ENTRIES IN VIEW.  
Press at any time to cancel printing.  
In the Schedule, Tel and User File applications  
touch  
and select PRINT.  
1.  
Open the desired application, press  
and touch  
225  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2. Select FILTER ON/OFF, then select TURN ON FILTER  
from the submenu. Enter the information to define the  
entries you want to print.  
The more information you enter, the more selective the  
filtering process will be.  
3. Touch  
4. Press  
touch  
, and select PRINT  
5. Select ALL [application name] ENTRIES.  
Press (ON) at any time to cancel printing.  
For a full explanation of the Filter function, see p. 213.  
Printing Schedule entries for specific periods  
1. Press  
to open the application.  
2. Display and select the date containing the entries you  
want to print, or a date that is included in the weekly or  
monthly period of entries that you want to print.  
3. Press (MENU), touch  
and select PRINT.  
4. Select ALL IN SELECTED DAY, . ..WEEK. or . ..MONTH.  
Press (ON) at any time to cancel printing.  
Printing using the Filer application  
Using the Filer, you can print related entries from  
different applications.  
Press (FILER).  
2. Select the folder from the Filer Drawer that contains the  
entries you want to print.  
Press  
Press  
(SEND).  
at any time to cancel printing.  
You can also print folder contents using the  
PERIPHERALS menu. After selecting the folder, select  
PRINT from the menu, then ALL IN SELECTED FOLDER  
from the submenu.  
226  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Printing all  
entries  
All entries in an application (or in a selected file in the  
Ann, Tel and User File applications) can be printed.  
To print all entries in an application,  
1. Open the application containing the entries you want to  
print.  
In the Schedule, Tel and User File applications, make  
sure that the Filter function is turned off (see p. 215).  
2. Press (MENU), touch  
3. Select ALL [application name] ENTRIES.  
Press at any time to cancel printing.  
, and select PRINT.  
To print all entries in a file in the Ann, Tel or User File  
application,  
1. Open the application containing the file you want to print  
and select the file.  
2. Press  
3. Select ALL [file name] ENTRIES.  
Press (ON) at any time to cancel printing.  
, touch  
and select PRINT.  
q
Sending Faxes from the unit  
With the optional CE-137T level converter and Sharp  
CE-FM1 fax/modem connected to the unit, it is easy to  
send copies by fax of single Notebook or Scrapbook  
entries, or the entire contents of a Filer folder. This lets  
you provide friends and associates with a faxed copy of  
the information when they need it. The Fax Send function  
is also handy when someone needs a map or diagram,  
because with the Scrapbook function you can make a  
drawing and send it directly by fax.  
227  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1. Turn off the unit.  
ing the  
2. Connect the unit and the level converter by plugging one  
end of the level converter into the unit’s Computer Link  
port.  
fax/modem  
3. Connect the fax/modem and the level converter by  
plugging the cable of the fax/modem into the converter.  
4. Plug the fax/modem into a wall jack.  
5. Turn on the unit.  
Setting  
fax/modem  
To use the fax/modem to send faxes, you first need to  
configure it.  
options  
With the fax/modem connected,  
1. Turn on the unit.  
2. Press  
and then touch  
to open  
the PERIPHERALS menu.  
3. Select GLOBAL SETTINGS.  
The submenu appears.  
4. Touch SET FAX OPTIONS and then touch SET  
FAX/MODEM OPTIONS. A display appears.  
228  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
L
5. Press  
to display the second screen of the SET  
FAX/MODEM OPTIONS.  
6. Select the dial type by touching the relevant setting.  
7. Touch The fax/modem is now set up for faxing.  
229  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting up  
the Fax  
Directory  
Any file in the Tel or User File application can be  
designated as the FAX directory. The designated file can  
be used normally in its application, while the names and  
fax numbers in the file’s entries are listed in a directory  
used by the fax function. The directory opens  
automatically each time you want to send a fax, allowing  
you to select the recipient from the names shown.  
1. Press  
and touch  
2. Select GLOBAL SETTINGS, then SET FAX OPTIONS,  
and finally SET UP FAX DIRECTORY.  
USER1 USER2 USER3  
NAME FI ELD  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
OTHER. FI. ELD .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
3. Set up the directory and touch  
To use data on a RAM card in teh FAX directory, touch  
in SET UP FAX DIRECTORY display to toggle  
to the card directory.  
when finished.  
l
When faxing, you can dial manually without using the  
FAX directory. See “Sending a fax” later in this chapter.  
230  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
You will need to enter your name and phone number as  
you want them to appear on the top of each faxed page  
and on the cover sheet (if you decide to use one when  
faxing).  
Setting up  
your  
personal  
information  
for cover  
sheets  
To set this information:  
1. Press  
, touch PERIPHERALS and then select  
GLOBAL SETTINGS.  
header.  
2. Touch SET FAX OPTIONS and then select SET UP  
COVER SHEET.  
3. Enter the information and touch  
Below is a sample cover sheet:  
when finished.  
Notebook  
Before faxing, be sure to set the correct date and time in  
the unit (see chapter 1). You are required by law to  
insure that your name, telephone, or fax number, and  
time and date appear on the top of each faxed page (see  
231  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
the inside front cover of this manual). The unit will insert  
this information automatically if it has been entered  
correctly.  
Sending a  
fax (Auto-  
matic  
You can fax a single Notebook or Scrapbook entry or you  
can fax an entire Filer folder. With the unit connected to  
the CE-FM1 fax/modem, and the unit turned on.  
dialing)  
,
.
From the Notebook:  
Select an entry and touch  
From the Scrapbook: Select an entry, press  
touch and select FAX SEND.  
,
From the Filer: Select a folder and touch  
.
2.  
3.  
4.  
From the Fax directory display, select a recipient and  
then touch (CALL].  
l
If you need to access a different directory, touch  
CHANGE FAX DIRECTORY, which opens the SET UP  
FAX DIRECTORY DISPLAY.  
l
If you want to use a cover sheet, check USE A COVER  
SHEET and see the section on Using a Cover sheet  
later in this chapter.  
Be sure to enter hyphens in the appropriate places in the  
fax number.  
Make any necessary adjustments to the number:  
Touch  
The unit will display the fax number in the confirmation  
box (with any changes you may have made) and dial it.  
Once connected, it will send the fax  
232  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The unit does not have an automatic redial function when  
faxing. If the line is busy, “A line error has occured!” will  
be displayed and faxing will be terminated.  
In step 3 above, you may want to make other changes to  
the fax number or type in another number altogether. To  
do so, simply enter any number from the keypad (or  
Making  
other  
changes  
to the  
keyboard) and then touch  
You can also use  
speed buttons to use predefined numbers or to add credit  
card codes in the dialing sequence (see Speed buttons  
later in this chapter).  
number  
First repeat steps 1 and 2 above.  
For example, you may want to add a “9” prefix before the  
number to get an outside line from within a company  
phone system. To add a “9” to the number,  
3. Touch  
on the touch pad (or on the keyboard). The  
number will appear in the top line of the display.  
4. Press  
on the keyboard. This adds a one-half  
second dialing pause.  
5. Touch the displayed fax number. It will be added to the  
confirmation box after the “9,“. Note the fax number is  
adjusted if LOCAL or USE 1 + NUMBER is checked.’  
Note that the LOCAL selection may not work correctly in  
some areas.  
6. Touch  
. The unit will now dial the number in the  
confirmation box and begin faxing automatically.  
Sending  
a fax  
(Manual  
dialing)  
In some instances you may want to dial a fax number  
manually, allowing you to hear the dial tone and other  
dialing sounds. Dialing manually with the unit is just like  
pressing SPEAKER on a conventional fax machine and  
then dialing. Note that you must have a connection with  
the receiving FAX machine and hear a fax tone before  
touching  
.
To send a FAX manually,  
233  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Select an entry and touch  
1. From the Notebook:  
,
From the Scrapbook: Select an entry, press  
touch and select FAX SEND.  
From the Filer: Select a folder and touch  
2. From the Fax directory, simply touch  
. There is  
no need to select a recipient unless you select a cover  
sheet and you wish the recipient’s information to appear  
on it (see using a cover sheet later in this chapter).  
3. Touch  
The  
button changes to  
. You should hear a dial tone within a few  
seconds.  
L
H&E-  
I
l
4. Now dial normally by touching the number pad on the  
screen.  
5. Touch  
.
You can use speed buttons when dialing manually.  
234  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
You may find that, in some cases, the fax number dials  
too quickly for a connection to be made. You can slow  
down the dialing sequence by inserting a comma (for  
example, after an area code) in the fax number field of  
the entry you want to send. Each comma inserts a  
one-half second dialing pause. To do this, open the  
application for the entry, and insert a comma at the  
appropriate place(s) in the fax number field using the  
usual entry procedures (see the Tel or User File sections  
for more information).  
Touch  
at any time before faxing to return to  
the Fax Directory.  
Touch  
or press (ON) to terminate fax  
sending at any time.  
When faxing Notebook entries, the following conditions  
l
Margin settings on the received fax may not match  
those in the Notebook entry.  
l
A preset letter font is used for faxing.  
You cannot select between pica and elite, or change  
the font pitch.  
l
If legal size paper is selected in the Notebook entry,  
and the receiving fax machine has roll-type paper, a  
legal-size page will be printed, if the receiving fax  
machine uses separate single sheets, the legal size  
page will be printed across two single pages.  
1. From the Notebook:  
Using a  
Cover  
sheet  
Select an entry and touch  
From the Scrapbook: Select an entry, press  
touch and select FAX SEND.  
,
From the Filer: Select a folder and touch  
.
2. Touch the USE A COVER SHEET box and then  
The Cover Sheet Preview display appears.  
235  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3. The name, position-company name and fax number of  
the fax recipient are entered automatically when you set  
up the Fax Directory (See 229). This information will  
appear on the faxed cover sheet. You can edit this  
information by touching the field and using the keyboard  
you wish.  
if  
4. Touch  
. The dialing screen appears.  
Use automatic or manual dialing procedures, as  
described (See p. 231 and p. 232).  
5. Touch  
. The faxing display appears. A flashing  
asterisk on the display indicates that faxing is under way.  
The number of pages sent and remaining to send are  
shown in the upper right.  
The maximum size of each field in the Cover Sheet  
Preview is:  
TO: 3 lines by 27 characters  
No.: line by 27 characters  
FROM: 4 lines by 27 characters  
Any frequently  
number can be assigned to one of  
Speed  
the six Speed buttons shown in the Dialling Screen.  
buttons  
Touching the Speed button for that number will then dial it  
automatically. This can significantly reduce your dialing  
time. Speed button numbers are set up via the  
PERIPHERALS menu.  
1. Press  
and touch  
to open the  
PERIPHERALS menu.  
l
In faxing mode, select SET UP SPEED BUTTONS from  
modify menu, then proceed to step 4.  
236  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2. Select GLOBAL SETTINGS.  
3. Touch SET FAX OPTIONS and then touch SET UP  
SPEED BUTTONS. The display appears.  
4. Touch  
and enter a title and a fax number for  
each button you want to use.  
5. Touch  
In SET UP SPEED BUTTONS display,  
Editing  
Speed  
button  
informa-  
tion  
1. Select the title or fax number to be edited.  
2. Press  
3. Make your changes in the editing window that appears.  
4. Touch  
Making a  
Speed  
button  
You can protect the security of Speed button numbers by  
assigning them the secret status. Secret numbers are  
displayed as asterisks in the confirmation window, so the  
actual digits cannot be seen.  
secret  
1. After assigning the number to a Speed button (see  
above), press  
and touch  
The  
MODIFY menu opens.  
2. Touch SET SECRET STATUS, select SECRET, and touch  
The number has now been assigned the  
secret status, then the number field become blank.  
To assign the number a non-secret status, follow the  
above procedure and select NOT SECRET in step 2.  
To edit the secret number, you have to unlock the unit  
first.  
237  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Enhancing Capabilities Using a RAM Card  
A RAM card can be used with your unit in any of three  
ways:  
to expand memory capacity,  
l
as a means of sharing data with other  
Series units, or of making use of data from 7000 or  
8000 Series Organizers,  
to backup the unit’s data.  
Before installing the RAM card, you must set the Secret  
function in your unit to match the Secret function setting  
in the RAM card. If the RAM card has never been used  
before and you will be initializing it, or if it has already  
been initialized but has never been used with a  
password, you must delete any password from your unit  
before installing the card. If the RAM card has been used  
with a password-whether in your unit or another-the  
password in the card and your unit must match.  
For a full explanation of the Secret function and using  
passwords, see p. 282.  
For a full explanation of how to install a RAM card, see p.  
221.  
If you install a RAM card that has been used in a model  
other than the  
Series in this unit and then turn  
the power on, a message will appear indicating that the  
format of the card is different from that of the unit.  
To use such a RAM card in this unit, all data in the card  
must be erased and the card must be initialized. Perform  
the following operations,  
You can also use RAM card data created on other  
models in this unit. See p. 241.  
1. With the card installed in the unit, turn the unit on. Touch  
when the card format message appears.  
2. Press the RESET switch while pressing  
A message will appear asking if you want to clear the  
238  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
unit’s memory.  
3. Touch  
. (Be careful not to touch  
here or you  
will lose all the data in the unit.)  
A message will appear asking if you want to clear the  
card memory.  
4. Touch  
All data on the card will be deleted and the card can now  
be used in your unit.  
The RAM card provides extra memory in the unit. While a  
RAM card does not expand the amount of main memory  
in the unit, it does add an auxiliary memory that can be  
easily accessed.  
Memory  
expansion  
To use a RAM card, install the card, select an application,  
and press  
The symbol CARD appears at the  
top of the display indicating that the card memory is now  
selected. All operations are the same as when using the  
main memory, but the RAM card gives you, for example,  
three more files in the Tel application, one more drawer  
of folders in the Filer application, etc. (See your RAM  
card manual for capacity and specifications.)  
l
When a RAM card is installed, pressing [SEARCH]  
displays a SEARCH window including buttons to select  
both card and unit memory.  
l
l
In the Filer application, you can collect entries only in  
the memory you are currently using.  
The unit keeps track of which memory (main or card)  
was last used for each application. So, for example, if  
you select the To Do application and it was last used  
with card memory, the unit will switch automatically to  
card memory. If you then select another application  
that was last used with main memory, the unit will  
switch back automatically to main memory.  
You can also store data on a RAM card by copying all  
data from the main unit’s memory. This is called “backing  
up.” Unnecessary data can then be deleted from the  
239  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
card. See the following section for more information.  
Backing up  
data to a  
RAM card  
“Backing up” means making a separate copy of your data  
which can be kept in a safe place. This is the simplest  
and easiest form of insurance against losing valuable  
information.  
When you backup to a RAM card, any information  
already on that card will be lost.  
With a RAM card installed in the unit:  
1. Make sure that the unit is unlocked (see p. 282). Press  
and touch PERIPHERALS to open the  
PERIPHERALS menu.  
2. Select RAM CARD TRANSFER.  
3. Select MAIN  
CARD (REPLACE).  
A warning message appears asking if you want to  
permanently delete all data on the RAM card.  
4. Touch  
(or  
to cancel the operation).  
The entries are backed up. (Backup time depends on  
how much data is stored in the unit.)  
l
Backing up data to a RAM card copies your information  
onto the card. The data in your unit’s main memory is  
not deleted.  
l
l
Data copied to a RAM card can be edited, deleted and  
worked with in the same way as data on the unit.  
You MUST unlock the unit before attempting RAM card  
transfers. If the unit is locked, the RAM CARD  
TRANSFER function be disabled.  
Restoring data from a RAM card  
“Restoring” data means copying data that was backed up  
to a RAM card back to the unit. To restore data, you use  
nearly the same procedure as for backing up (above), but  
in step 3 be sure to select CARD MAIN (REPLACE),  
which copies data from the RAM card to the unit.  
240  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
When you restore data from a RAM card, any existing  
information in the unit will be lost.  
Sharing data  
with another  
unit  
Data and entries can be transferred easily and quickly  
between  
Series units simply by swapping a  
RAM card between them. You can receive data from  
7000 and 8000 Series models (you cannot, however,  
move data from your unit to these models), and then  
work with that data, but it must first be converted into the  
format used on your unit.  
l
Applications may not match on different unit models.  
Entries can only be transferred if there is a matching  
application on the receiving unit.  
l
Memo entries from the 7000 and 8000 Series  
Organizers will be transferred to the Notebook, and  
Business Card entries from the 8000 Series will be  
transferred to USER FILE 1 in the User File  
application. All other matching applications will share  
the same name.  
l
A RAM card used with a password in a 7000 or 8000  
Series Organizer cannot be used with this unit. You  
must first delete the password from the card in the  
other unit.  
l
There are a few other restrictions for receiving  
Series data via a RAM card. These are the  
same as for receiving data directly from a  
Series Organizer. See p. 274.  
To use data from  
Series Organizers:  
1.  
Turn the unit off and install the RAM card that has  
Series data stored on it.  
2. Turn on the unit.  
A message appears.  
The f or ma t of t he RAM c a r d is  
di f f er ent f r om t hat of t he mai n uni t .  
If you want t o acces s t he dat a on it:  
1) Select a n Application (i.e.  
2) Pr es s [ MENU] t hen [ PERI PHERALS] .  
3) Sel ect I MPORT OTHER FORMAT.  
4) Select VIA RAM CARD.  
241  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Touch  
.
Select the application on the unit that you want to append  
the card’s entries to by pressing its application key.  
In the Tel and User File applications, also select the file.  
To receive Business Card entries, make sure that USER  
FILE 1 is selected.  
Only the entries in the corresponding application or file on  
the  
Series card will be copied.  
Press (MENU) and touch  
menu.  
to open the  
5.  
FORMAT  
6. Select IMPORT OTHER  
A submenu opens.  
7. Select VIA RAM CARD.  
A message appears.  
Do you really want to add all dat a  
in this mode f r om t he RAM car d t o  
t he MAI N uni t ?  
Touch  
8.  
All entries of the selected application on the RAM card  
are copied to your unit and appended to any existing data  
in the application.  
Repeat the steps above for all applications you want to  
import to your unit.  
Transferring Data  
There are several ways to transfer information, entire  
entries, or files between the unit and other information  
processing devices, including personal computers and  
other SHARP Organizers. In this way, you can backup  
242  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
your information to guard against losing it, or copy  
information so that you or someone else can work with it  
on another device. A summary of transfer devices,  
transferable data, and tasks a transfer device is most  
suited to is provided in the table below.  
Transferable  
data and direc-  
tion of transfer  
send,  
Peripherals  
required  
Transfer  
device  
Most suitable task  
receive)  
Filer  
243  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Transferable  
data and direc-  
tion of transfer  
send,  
Transfer  
device  
Peripherals  
required  
Most suitable task  
receive)  
Notebook  
Filer  
* Depending upon the SHARP or third party software you  
are using, features and capabilities may vary.  
l
The auto power off function (see 51) is disabled in all  
transfer modes.  
l
When transferring data from other models, only entries  
in a mode (application) supported on the  
Series unit can be sent. However, the Memo mode on  
other models corresponds to the Notebook application  
on the  
Series unit, and the Business Card  
mode on the 8000 Series to USER FILE 1 in the User  
File application.  
Transfer  
between  
Data can be transferred directly between two  
Series units via the infrared port. Single entries or all the  
entries in an application can be transferred in the  
Series units Schedule, To Do, Ann, Notebook, Outline, and  
Scrapbook applications; and single entries or all the  
entries in a file can be transferred in the Tel and User  
File applications. Using the Filer, a group of entries from  
different applications can also be transferred.  
The transfer procedure differs according to whether single  
entries, complete files, or folders are to be transferred.  
244  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Press  
at any time to cancel a transfer.  
After a transfer, the display returns to the application  
being used before the transfer procedure was begun.  
Received data is stored and appended to the existing  
data of the selected application. After a transfer with  
and  
the data is also automatically  
assigned to the IN folder of the Filer application so that  
you can check it after transfer. It is therefore  
recommended that you always keep the IN folder  
empty. (See p. 204).  
If a RAM card is installed, applications on it can also be  
selected to transfer data to or from. See p. 251.  
In the Tel or User File applications, the contents of  
fields that are not set up in the receiving file cannot be  
transferred. Also, if the type of a field (text or picture) is  
different in the two units, it cannot be transferred.  
No peripheral devices are required to transfer data via  
the infrared port. However, infrared transfers are easily  
affected by ambient conditions which may interfere with  
this type of transfer. Connecting the two units with the  
optional CE-315L cable will ensure a more reliable  
transfer. See p. 248.  
Initial set-up  
There is no special hardware set-up involved in infrared  
transfers. And if you only want to transfer single entries or  
single Filer folders using  
and  
, there is no  
software set-up either: all you have to do is set up the  
units properly (step 4 below). For all other infrared  
transfers, follow the procedure below.  
1. Press  
models, press  
and touch  
(or, on some  
[PERIPHERALS)) on both units to  
open the PERIPHERALS menu.  
2. Select GLOBAL SETTINGS (only  
select SET UNIT TO UNIT PATH.  
and then  
A submenu opens.  
3. Select VIA INFRARED PORT.  
245  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4.  
infrared ports are in line  
Place the two units so that their  
and within 80 cm of each other.  
l
l
Do not leave the unit cover more than three-quarters  
open during transfer or it will break the infrared transfer.  
When transferring entire applications or files, or entries  
marked as secret, both units must be unlocked (see  
282).  
l
Although infrared transfer requires no special hardware,  
it is easily affected by ambient conditions and other  
factors such as external light, undercharged batteries,  
large transfer distance, transfer angle, etc. As a result,  
while infrared transfer is in itself quite easy, there is  
considerable scope for errors, failure to transfer data  
and incomplete data transfer (missing data). It is  
therefore recommended that you confirm the received  
data after an infrared transfer.  
l
l
Avoid direct sunlight.  
Keep the infrared port clean with a soft, dry cloth. Dust  
on the port will make transfer difficult.  
Transferring single entries  
Single entries can be transferred in all applications.  
1.  
Turn on both units.  
2.  
On the sending unit, select the entry you want to send in  
the Index mode or display it in the View mode.  
246  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3.  
4.  
Press  
Press  
on the receiving unit.  
on the sending unit.  
The selected entry is transferred and appended to data in  
the appropriate application.  
You can also transfer single entries using UNIT TO UNIT  
TRANSFER in the PERIPHERALS menu. In step 3, after  
opening the same application as on the sending unit,  
select GET DATA (APPEND) on the receiving unit. Then,  
in step 4, select SEND SELECTED ENTRY on the  
sending unit.  
Transferring all entries in an application  
With the exception of the Tel and User File applications,  
all entries in all applications can be transferred. In the Tel  
and User File, all entries in individual files can be  
transferred.  
1.  
Turn on both unit.  
2.  
Open the same application on each.  
If you are in the Tel or User File application, also select  
the file.  
On the receiving unit,  
3.  
l
Press  
and touch PERIPHERALS .  
l
Select UNIT TO UNIT TRANSFER.  
A submenu opens.  
,
l
.,..  
IN THIS FILE  
l
Select GET DATA (APPEND).  
247  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4. On the sending unit,  
l
Press  
and touch  
.
l
Select UNIT TO UNIT TRANSFER.  
A submenu opens.  
l
Select SEND ALL IN THIS MODE, or SEND ALL IN  
THIS FILE in the Tel and User File applications.  
All entries in the application or in the selected file are  
transferred.  
In the Schedule, Tel and User File applications, if the  
Filter function is turned on, only the filtered entries will be  
transferred.  
Transferring a Filer folder  
1. Turn on both units.  
2. On the sending unit, select the folder you want to send in  
the Filer Drawer.  
3. Press  
4. Press  
on the receiving unit.  
on the sending unit.  
The transferred entries are stored in the appropriate  
applications and are also automatically assigned to the IN  
folder on the receiving unit.  
l
After completing the transfer, you should move the data  
from the IN folder on the receiving unit to another folder.  
You can also transfer folders using UNIT TO UNIT  
TRANSFER in the PERIPHERALS menu. In step 3, after  
opening the Filer application, select GET DATA (ADD TO  
INBOX) on the receiving unit. Then, in step select  
SEND SELECTED FOLDER.  
Cable transfer  
For more reliable data transfer, you can connect two  
Series units using the optional CE-315L cable.  
To set up the units with the cable,  
1. Turn off both units.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2. Open the cover of the  
cable jack on each unit.  
3. Plug one end of the cable into the cable jack on each unit.  
4. Turn on both units.  
Press and touch  
5. Select GLOBAL SETTINGS and SET UNIT TO UNIT  
PATH.  
6. Select VIA DIRECT CABLE.  
l
l
To conserve battery power, disconnect the cable as  
soon as a transfer is completed.  
and  
do not work in cable transfers. You  
must use the PERIPHERALS menu to transfer data by  
cable. Pressing these keys always initiates infrared  
transfer regardless of the selection for SET UNIT TO  
UNIT PATH or of whether the cable is connected or not.  
7. Transfer data following the same menu procedures as for  
the transfer shown on pages 246 to 248.  
Receiving  
data from  
units  
To connect the two units, you need the optional CE-315L  
cable.  
other than  
the 89001  
9000  
Initial set-up  
1. Turn off both units.  
2. Open the cover of the  
cable jack on each unit.  
Series  
3. Plug one end of the cable into the cable jack on each unit.  
To conserve battery power, disconnect the cable as soon  
as a transfer is completed.  
249  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Transferring data  
1.  
Turn on both units.  
2.  
On the  
Series unit, open the application in  
which you want to receive the data.  
Only data corresponding to the application selected on  
the receiving unit will be transferred (regardless of the  
application selected on the sending unit).  
In the Tel and User File applications, select the  
destination file. To receive Business Card entries, make  
sure that USER FILE 1 is selected.  
3. On the 9000 Series unit.  
nd touch  
(or, on some  
l
Press (MENU)  
models, press  
Select  
l
ER FORMAT.  
A submenu opens.  
Select VIA DIRECT CABLE.  
l
A message appears.  
Please set the sending  
unit to PC-LINK mode.  
When ready, touch [I SEE].  
II  
4.  
On the sending unit,  
l
Press  
(or  
on some models) (OPTION) to  
open the Option menu.  
l
Select PC LINK.  
5. On the  
Series unit, touch  
to receive  
all entries in the selected application on the other unit.  
Repeat the steps above for all applications you want to  
import to your Organizer.  
l
Memo entries from units other than the  
Series will be transferred to the Notebook, and  
Business Card entries will be transferred to USER FILE  
1
in the User File application. All other matching  
applications will share the same name.  
l
There are a few other restrictions. See p. 274.  
250  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
You can also transfer data from units that are not  
Series using a RAM card or via the PC-Link  
mode. See p. 241 and p. 251, respectively.  
Transferring  
data to/from  
a RAM card  
application  
To transfer data between two units, you can also select  
an application on the RAM card to transfer data either to  
or from.  
Simply press  
to select the card memory in the  
application in which you want to send or receive the data,  
then press [GET) or  
, or open the PERIPHERALS  
menu.  
To receive single entries using  
or Filer folders in  
the card memory by either infrared or cable transfer, first  
select the card memory using SET DATA DESTINATION  
in the PERIPHERALS menu on the receiving unit.  
Exchanging Information with a Personal  
Computer  
q
Using SHARP’s optional Organizer Link software and  
cable package or certain third party software packages,  
you can exchange data with a personal computer. Certain  
software will allow you to exchange data with a personal  
computer via the unit’s infrared port using the optional  
CE-IR2 wireless interface. This makes it possible, for  
example, to use the unit when outside your home or  
office, then later transfer the data you have entered on  
the unit to your desktop computer.  
To set-up the unit for use with the Organizer Link:  
1. Make sure the unit is turned off.  
2. l For infrared transfer, set up the unit with the CE-IR2  
wireless interface. (See the CE-IR2 manual for details.)  
l
For a cable transfer, connect the Organizer Link cable  
to the unit’s  
cable jack. (See the unit Link  
manual for details.)  
251  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3. Press  
4. Press  
and touch  
.
5. Select GLOBAL SETTINGS.  
6. Select SET PC LINK PATH.  
7. Select VIA INFRARED PORT (for infrared transfer) or VIA  
DIRECT CABLE (for cable transfer).  
8. Press  
LINK MODE.  
touch [PERIPHERALS and select PC  
PC- LI NK READY!  
Whe n you are finished exchanging  
information, pr e s s [ON] to quit.  
Your unit is now ready to transfer data. Consult the  
Organizer Link manual regarding subsequent transfer  
procedures.  
Press (ON) at any time to exit the PC Link mode.  
You can use the software developed for  
Series Organizers. If you are doing this, select IMPORT  
OTHER FORMAT from the PERIPHERALS menu instead  
of PC LINK MODE in step 7 above. Then select VIA PC  
LINK. The above display will appear.  
This can also be used for transferring  
data to your unit.  
Series  
The Organizer Link is for transferring data to a computer  
in the same location as the unit. For a full explanation of  
how to transfer data to remote computers using  
telecommunications, see the “Terminal Mode” below.  
252  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Terminal Mode  
The Terminal mode lets you use the telecommunications  
functions of the unit to link to a “remote” computer or  
system (one that is physically distant), including a  
computer bulletin board service (BBS) or an on-line  
information service such as CompuServe, and to transfer  
data via phone lines between the unit and a personal  
computer. The Terminal mode makes it possible, for  
example, to link your unit with your computer at home or  
at the office using ordinary telephone lines, or to  
download (receive) information from public or private  
subscription databases.  
The Terminal mode is accessed through the  
PERIPHERALS menu. Once selected, it functions as any  
other application, with its own menu for carrying out  
commands and configuring the unit for  
telecommunications.  
Hardware  
requirements  
To transfer data in the Terminal mode, you will need the  
optional SHARP CE-FM1 FAX/MODEM and CE-137T  
LEVEL CONVERTER. If you already have a  
Hayes-compatible modem, you will need a SHARP  
CE-130T or CE-131T cable, -and a straight, male-to-male  
RS-232C cable to connect the modem to the unit.  
If you use the CE-131T cable, you will also need a null  
modem adapter. For an explanation of how to configure  
the null modem adapter, see the table below.  
Null modem pin configuration  
1
3
1
2
2
5
4
3
4
5
6, 8  
7
20  
7
20  
253  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using an incorrect cable may damage the cable, the  
modem, and/or the unit.  
With the unit turned off, connect the modem to the unit’s  
cable jack as shown in the diagram below. (See  
Connecting  
the modem  
how to connect the  
your modem manual concerning  
modem to the telephone line.)  
CE-1 30T  
-I-  
CE-130T  
CE-131T  
Hayes-compatible cable (straight,  
(with null modem  
adapter)  
adapter  
CE-137T  
37T  
CE-FM1  
Fax/Modem  
Level Converter  
Opening the With the modem connected,  
Terminal  
mode  
1. Turn on the unit.  
2. Press  
and touch  
to open the  
PERIPHERALS menu.  
3. Select TERMINAL MODE.  
The Dialing Directory display opens.  
254  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
This is the initial display whenever the Terminal mode is  
selected. The display is blank now, but will show the  
entries you make for dialing access, similar to the Index  
mode in other applications.  
Touch  
at any time to quit the Terminal mode.  
In the Terminal mode,  
Configuring  
the modem  
settings  
ress  
SETTING.  
, touch  
and select MODEM  
The MODEM SETTING window opens.  
SETTING  
MNP  
. PULSE .  
LINE . . TYP.E .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
..  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
SPEAKER .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. ON. . . q  
WAKE .UP  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
..  
.
..  
.
..  
.
..  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
REDI AL  
MNP  
MNP (Microcorn Network Protocol) is an  
error-correction protocol implemented on many modems  
to help alleviate data errors caused by telephone line  
noise, etc. Set this to ON if your modem supports MNP.)  
LINE TYPE  
Telephone lines use either pulse or tone dialing.  
Pushbutton phones generally (but not always) use tone  
dialing, and rotary phones use pulse dialing. (For more  
information, see your modem manual.) Select your line  
255  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SPEAKER  
If your modem has a built-in speaker, selecting ON lets  
you hear the dialing and connection tones. The speaker  
is turned off automatically after a connection is made.  
WAKE UP  
If set to ON, the unit will automatically turn on in the  
Terminal mode when called by a remote system unless  
ASK PASSWORD for the start-up display is set to ON.  
There are other hardware/software requirements for  
using this function. For more information, contact your  
local SHARP dealer.  
REDIAL  
This is the number of times the unit will redial a number  
if a connection is not made on the first attempt -if the  
number was busy or did not answer, for example. The  
number can be set in the range O-99.  
Of the settings above, the most important is the line type.  
Selecting an incorrect line type will not damage the  
modem or unit, but it will make it impossible to connect  
with a remote unit using the modem.  
2. Touch any desired settings to select them.  
Use  
and  
and  
to move between fields, and  
to select the desired settings.  
3. Use the number keys to set REDIAL.  
4. Touch when you have finished with the settings.  
Dialing  
You set data transfer parameters for making dialing  
settings  
connections using the Setting display of the Dialing  
Directory. Each entry that you make can have its own  
settings, so that you can dial a number simply by  
selecting the desired entry.  
In the Terminal mode,  
256  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1. Touch  
.
The Setting display appears. Scroll the display using  
and  
to view all items.  
NUMBER  
PARI TY  
ODD EVEN .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
DATA BITS  
STOP BITS  
.
.
.
.
.
..  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
: ON  
LOCAL ECHO  
NAME  
The name of the dialing entry.  
NUMBER  
The phone number to dial.  
SPEED (bps)  
Transmission speed, measured in bits per second (bps).  
PARITY  
A simple form of error checking during transmission.  
DATA BITS  
The size of each data character transmitted (which is  
measured in bits).  
STOP BITS  
Signals sent to indicate the end of each transmitted  
character.  
A form of “handshaking’‘-or flow control-between the  
modems.  
LOCAL ECHO  
Selects the display of characters when typing and  
connected to a remote terminal.  
SHIFT IN/OUT  
A switch to distinguish between accented and  
unaccented alphanumeric characters.  
2 5 7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7F CODE CONVERSION  
Selects whether a certain transmission code is  
interpreted as delete or backspace in  
data transfer.  
SEND LF AFTER CR  
Affects formatting of lines on a remote terminal display.  
RECEIVE LF AFTER CR  
Affects formatting of lines on the unit’s display.  
DELAY TIME  
The time the sending unit will wait for the receiving unit  
to read a line of sent text. Set any value from O-99  
tenths of a second.  
EMULATION  
Selects a type of computer “terminal” for the unit  
to emulate, which serves as a basic input/output device  
with some remote systems.  
WRAP AROUND  
Moves characters, to a new line when the end of a line  
is reached on the display.  
TAB  
Sets tab characters.  
AUTO REPEAT  
Repeats keys’ functions when pressed and held.  
CURSOR  
Selects the appearance of the cursor.  
CURSOR TRANSLATE (HORIZONTAL/VERTICAL)  
Sets the number of characters or lines that  
+
cursor key operation moves the cursor.  
Except for the transmission speed, the default settings on  
the unit should work fine for most modem  
communications (except that you have to enter the name  
and number). When settings do need to be changed,  
match the settings with those on the remote system being  
called.  
Use  
and  
or touch the desired settings to  
select them.  
2. Enter the name of the dialing entry.  
258  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3. Move to the NUMBER field.  
4. Enter the telephone number (if it is not a local number, be  
sure to include the area code).  
5. Move to the SPEED (bps) field.  
Data transmission can only go as fast as the  
of  
the two modems-your modem and the modem on the  
remote computer-being used. If one modem is capable  
of 2400 bps transmission speed and the other of 1200  
bps, 1200 bps will have to be used.  
6. Select the transmission speed.  
7. Make any other necessary setting changes.  
8. Press (2nd)  
enter a password to access this entry (see p. 282).  
(Press again to deselect it.)  
if you want to make it necessary to  
:
.
.
.
.
300  
. 2400. .48.0.0. 9600 .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
__ __  
.
.
.
__ __ __  
.
__  
.
.
.
.
.
.
ODD EVEN  
.
.
BITS  
__ . . ___ ______  
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
2
STOP BITS  
.
___ __  
.
.
. .  
. . . . . . . . . . . . .  
OFF  
f
LOCAL ECHO  
9. Touch  
The settings for the dialing entry are now stored.  
l
If you are calling from a private PBX telephone system,  
you may have to dial 9 or some other number to get an  
outside line before dialing the number you want.  
Connection to an outside line on a PBX system usually  
takes a second or two, so if the modem immediately  
dials the number you want to call, part of the  
number may be lost. To avoid this problem, put a  
comma at the appropriate place(s) in the telephone  
number, which instructs the modem to pause when  
dialing.  
259  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
l
It is beyond the scope of this manual to explain all  
aspects of telecommunicating, including modem  
protocols, terminal emulation, etc. For further  
information, consult your modem manual or a good  
book on computer telecommunications.  
Changing  
dialing  
entry  
To change the settings in any dialing entry,  
1. Select the entry from the Dialing Directory display.  
2. Touch  
settings  
The entry appears in the Setting display.  
3. Make any changes you would like.  
4. Touch STORE].  
The new settings are stored.  
Making a  
call  
After you have set up the modem with the unit, and made  
an entry for the BBS, computer information service, or  
other remote computer you want to call, you are ready to  
telecommunicate.  
1. Open the Terminal mode.  
The Dialing Directory appears, showing the entry you  
have made. The field on the right indicates the four basic  
communications settings-transmission speed, data bits,  
parity, stop bits-that you selected for the entry.  
TERMI NAL  
.J.o.hn . Smi .t .h.  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. Br. .a d .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
2. Select the entry that you want to call.  
3. Touch CONNECT].  
The number is  
A message should appear  
260  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
indicating that a connection is made with the modem on  
the other end of the line.  
If the other modem answers, but no connection can be  
made due to a settings mismatch or another cause, or if  
a connection is made but “garbage” characters appear on  
the display, press  
to disconnect and try again. If  
you still have trouble connecting, see  
“Telecommunications troubleshooting” on p. 271.  
l
Line noise can generate “garbage” characters. If you  
can connect with a remote unit at 2400, 4800 or 9600  
bps, but garbled characters appear on the screen, try  
making the connection using a slower transmission  
speed.  
l
If your telephone line has a “call waiting” feature, you  
may get data errors or garbage characters on the  
screen when someone tries to call you while you are  
connected to a remote computer. In some areas, you  
are able to temporarily disable this feature before  
linking up to the remote computer. Contact your  
telephone company for details.  
l
If you connect, but you do not see any characters on  
the display when you type, or you see double  
characters, change the local echo setting for the entry  
to ON or OFF, respectively (see p. 257).  
l
Unlock the unit before selecting a secret entry.  
Hanging up  
When you want to disconnect, you must “log off” from the  
remote computer. Do not simply unplug the modem or the  
telephone line connection. All  
and information  
databases have specific procedures for logging off, or  
hanging up. Follow those procedures, which will log you  
off automatically. After logging off, press (ON) on the unit  
to hang up. If for any reason, the auto log off procedure  
fails, or you are connected to another individual user,  
press (ON) at any time to end the call and return to the  
Dialing Directory display.  
261  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Receiving a  
call  
In addition to making outgoing calls, it is also possible to  
receive calls from other modems by setting the unit to  
“auto answer” in the Terminal mode.  
Open the Terminal mode.  
The Dialing Directory appears.  
2. Select a blank entry field and touch  
.
3. Enter the name of the expected caller, or some general  
name such as “Answer”.  
Leave the NUMBER field blank.  
Make the settings you would like to use to answer the  
incoming call (the speed setting may be the only setting  
you need to change).  
4. Touch  
5. From the Dialing Directory display, select the entry that  
you just made.  
TERMI NAL  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
6. Touch  
The on-line display appears.  
7. Type  
TO  
262  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
This sets the unit modem to automatically answer a call  
after one ring.  
8. Press  
Any call will be automatically answered.  
9. Press (ON) to turn off auto answer or to disconnect the  
call when finished.  
The unit’s auto power off feature is disabled in the  
Terminal mode. Because power is drawn from the unit’s  
batteries unless the optional external power supply is  
connected (see p.  
auto answer should be set up  
just prior to the time a call is expected.  
For a full explanation of AT dialing commands (such as  
consult your modem manual.  
When you are connected to another computer via  
modem, anything you type on the keyboard is sent to the  
remote computer, and anything sent to you appears on  
your display.  
On-line  
operations  
(Terminal  
menus)  
Commands accessed from the Terminal menu add power  
and flexibility to the process. In the Terminal mode,  
press (MENU) and touch  
or  
FIXED sets lines of text to  
“wrap” (breaks lines so they fit on  
the unit’s display): VIRTUAL sets  
the unit’s display as a window  
which can move across an 80 x 24  
character full-size “‘virtual” display  
(see p. 271).  
Changes the font size in the  
Terminal window display to large or  
small.  
263  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Starts an upload.  
Starts a download.  
UPLOAD  
Select to stop a download in  
process or when you have finished  
downloading.  
STOP DOWNLOAD  
SEND BREAK-CODE  
Sends a break code, which  
interrupts a process. Also  
necessary in some log-off  
procedures.  
UP NUMERIC KEYPAD  
MODEM SETTING  
I
Changes dialing settings while on  
line. (Does not change setting in  
individual entries.) Exactly the same  
as the setting display except that it  
does not have a NAME or  
NUMBER field.  
Configure a modem settings  
(see p. 255)  
L
Opens a numeric keypad window  
on the display. (This keypad  
functions only in VT-1 00 terminal  
emulation see 270.)  
Press  
to leave the on-line mode.  
l
The  
key functions as a Control key while the unit  
is on-line. See p. 298 for the key combinations  
required to produce ASCII codes.  
l
To enter accented characters  
mode, use  
If you try to do this with SHIFT  
DATA BIT to 7, the modem connection might be broken.  
If this occurs, press to leave the on-line mode  
etc.) in on-line  
.
set to ON and  
and change SHIFT IN/OUT to OFF or DATA BIT to 8 in  
the dialing entry you are using, then try again.  
Data transfer The unit can upload (send) entries from the Notebook  
application in either ASCII (text) format or using the  
XMODEM file transfer protocol. It can also send Filer  
folders using XMODEM. And it can download (receive)  
text and files using either ASCII or XMODEM. ASCII (the  
American Standard Code for Information Interchange) is  
an internationally  
character set that makes it  
possible to transfer text between different kinds of  
computers, and for text typed on one computer to appear  
in the same form on a remote computer. No error  
264  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
correction is implemented during an ASCII transfer.  
XMODEM is a file transfer protocol which implements  
error correction.  
The number of pages of data downloaded as a Notebook  
entry will be displayed as  
in the Index mode. Once  
this is downloaded, open the entry in the View or Edit  
mode to display the number correctly.  
Uploading data  
In the Terminal mode,  
Access a remote computer or system by making or  
receiving a call.  
1.  
2.  
Press (MENU), touch  
and select UPLOAD.  
The UPLOAD submenu appears.  
l
For the MODEM SETTING (see p.  
set to ON the XMODEM protocol is not available.  
Check MNP is set to OFF.  
when MNP is  
3. Select uploading text using ASCII or XMODEM, or  
uploading a folder using XMODEM.  
l
If you selected an upload of text, a display similar to the  
Index mode appears, showing all the Notebook entries  
you have made. Select the entry containing the text you  
want to upload.  
l
If you selected an upload of a folder, a display similar to  
the Filer Drawer opens. Select the folder you want to  
upload.  
4.  
Touch  
to upload your selection (or  
to cancel it).  
265  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The selected entry or folder is uploaded.  
Press (ON) at any time to cancel an upload.  
Certain computer information services require specific  
log-on procedures before you can upload your data.  
Consult the service provider whose system you are using  
for details about this. You can automate the log-on  
procedures if you wish. See p. 268, “Auto log-on.”  
Downloading data  
In the Terminal mode,  
1. Access a remote computer or system by making or  
receiving a call.  
2. Press  
touch  
and select  
DOWNLOAD.  
The DOWNLOAD submenu appears.  
3. Select downloading text using ASCII or XMODEM, or  
downloading a folder using XMODEM.  
l
If you select to download text by XMODEM, a text box  
opens at this time asking you to enter a name to store  
the entry under. Enter a name up to 20 characters long  
and touch  
The selected entry or file is downloaded.  
Press at any time to cancel a download.  
4. When the download is completed, press  
and  
266  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
touch  
5. Select STOP DOWNLOAD.  
l
If you selected to download text using ASCII, a text box  
opens at this time asking you to enter a name to store  
the entry under. Enter a name up to 20 characters long  
and touch  
Certain computer information services require specific  
log-on procedures before you can download data.  
Consult the service provider whose system you are using  
for details about this. You can automate the log-on  
procedures if you wish. See 268, “Auto log-on.”  
Data transfer via CompuServe  
It is easy to upload a folder from your unit to  
CompuServe, from where it can be downloaded by  
friends or associates whenever they want.  
To upload a folder:  
1. Access CompuServe using the normal log-on procedure.  
2. Type GO EASY and press (ENTER) to go to the  
Electronic Mail Service.  
The CompuServe Mail menu appears.  
3. Press  
4. Press  
5. Press  
to select UPLOAD a message.  
to select XMODEM  
protocol.  
to select Binary.  
The Transfer Type display appears.  
6. Press  
and touch  
Select UPLOAD,  
then select UPLOAD FOLDER (XMODEM).  
The UPLOAD FOLDER window opens.  
7. Select the folder you want to upload and touch  
.
The uploading process begins.  
8. When you see the message, “File Transfer Completed!  
Press  
press  
.
267  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The Send menu appears.  
9. Press  
to select SEND.  
10. Answer all prompts from CompuServe. Text in bold face  
indicates your answers.  
(Name or User ID)  
Subject: Product Info [ENTER]  
Your Name:  
John Smith [ENTER]  
TO: 101115, 3174  
From: John Smith  
Subj: Product Info  
Is this correct? (Y or N) y [ENTER]  
Message sent to 101115, 3174  
Press <CR>! [ENTER]  
11. When the CompuServe Mail menu appears again, type  
bye and press  
to exit from CompuServe.  
Auto log-on  
When you call a BBS or information database, the log-on  
procedure in which you enter your name, user number,  
and password to gain access to the system is probably  
the same each time you connect. You can automate this  
log-on procedure on the unit, making it faster (saving on  
telephone charges) and more convenient.  
1. Open the Terminal mode.  
The Dialing Directory appears.  
2. Select the entry whose log-on procedure you want to  
automate.  
3. Touch  
4. Touch  
The Auto Log-On display opens.  
268  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
S e a r c h  
f or 0. 1 s econd)  
The auto log-on procedure is set up using the character  
strings (text) you would normally enter manually when  
logging on to the BBS or information database, in  
conjunction with these commands:  
l
Wn  
Wait  
n
tenths of a second; for example, W2  
would introduce a 0.2 second pause before the  
next step of a procedure.  
Instructs the unit to search for a character  
string, sent from the BBS, for example, before  
moving to the next step of the log-on procedure.  
For example, SUSER ID: means wait for the  
text “USER ID:” to be received before continuing.  
Instructs the unit to reply to a character string.  
For example, RJOHN JOHNSON means send  
the text “JOHN JOHNSON”.  
.
.
Inserts a carriage return at the end of a  
character string. Carriage returns must be  
included at the end of lines in a log-on  
procedure to execute the procedure. is  
l
entered from unit using  
.
For example, if you are entering the log-on script to  
access CompuServe, you should see something like the  
screen below.  
TERMI NAL  
269  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5. Enter your text.  
l
Enter a after each command.  
l
Search strings (entered using the S command) must be  
entered exactly as the system you’re calling normally  
displays them. This means that you must enter  
and lower-case letters in the auto log-on set-up exactly  
as those letters are shown when logging on manually.  
You may have to log onto a system manually at least  
once to copy the system’s text strings in order to write  
a log-on procedure.  
6. Touch  
when you have finished to store the auto  
log-on text.  
The Setting display appears.  
7. Touch  
again to store the entry.  
Terminal  
emulation  
There are two terminal emulation modes available on this  
unit: TTY (teletypewriter) and the more advanced  
stands for “video terminal”), which adds greater  
formatting controls and enhanced text handling and  
display. Select the one the remote computer/system  
which you are communicating with supports in the dialing  
entry.  
You can then configure your terminal using the last six  
parameters in the entry (WRAP AROUND, TAB, AUTO  
REPEAT, CURSOR, CURSOR TRANSLATE  
according to your  
requirements.  
While the unit’s default settings will work fine for virtually  
all of your telecommunications, you may at some time  
find the need to change the emulation settings. (See p.  
In VT-100 emulation mode, you can use a VT-1 00  
numeric keypad, which can be used like the function keys  
on a standard computer, on the unit display. To use this in  
on-line mode,  
1. Press  
, touch  
, and select POP UP  
NUMERIC KEYPAD.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The keypad appears.  
2. Touch the keys on the keypad as required.  
3. Touch  
when you have finished with the  
keypad.  
You can move the keypad to any place on the display.  
Touch the upper left-hand corner of the keypad and drag  
it to the place where you want it.  
The Terminal menu cannot be accessed while-the  
keypad is displayed.  
In addition, you can set the unit’s display to FIXED or  
The unit’s display is smaller  
VIRTUAL using the menu.  
than that of standard personal computers. When  
VIRTUAL is selected, text transferred from personal  
computers will be received in the same format as for a  
conventional remote terminal, and the unit’s display will  
form a window on the text. Use the cursor keys to view  
text that is off the display. In the default setting, pressing  
+ cursor key will move the display window 40  
characters horizontally or 8 lines vertically.  
If FIXED is selected, text that cannot fit on one line is  
moved to a new line.  
A list of common telecommunications problems and their  
munications solutions is provided below.  
troubleshoot-  
ing  
Remote unit answers but no  
connection is made.  
Problem:  
User message: None, or NO CARRIER  
Settings mismatch between unit and  
Cause:  
remote unit.  
Excessive line noise.  
Solution:  
Check configuration (i.e. data speed,  
parity, data bits, stop bits) by selecting  
CONFIGURATION from the menu.  
Wait until line noise subsides and try  
again.  
271  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Problem:  
Remote unit answers but received  
characters are garbled.  
User message: None.  
Cause:  
Incorrect parity, data bits, or stop bits  
setting.  
Excessive line noise.  
Change parity, data bits and/or stop bits  
configuration settings.  
Wait until line noise subsides-and try  
again.  
Solution:  
Problem:  
Connection with remote unit  
terminates unexpectedly.  
User message: None.  
Cause:  
Solution:  
Surge of line noise, user error, etc.  
Try again.  
Problem:  
User message:  
Dialing terminated unexpectedly.  
There was a problem during the dialing  
and auto dialing was terminated.  
Incorrect phone number entered.  
Incorrect line type selected (tone or  
pulse).  
Cause:  
Modem not connected to phone line.  
Solution:  
Press  
and check the phone number  
in the Dialing Directory.  
Check the Line Type setting in the  
MODEM SETTING window.  
Check that the modem is connected  
correctly to the unit and the telephone line.  
Problem:  
Auto log-on fails.  
User message: There was a problem during the auto log  
on. Please check out the auto log on  
commands.  
Cause:  
Incorrect auto log-on settings.  
Excessive line noise.  
Solution:  
Check auto log-on settings. In particular,  
make sure the Sy and Ry character  
strings are correct and that is included  
272  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
at the end of each line.  
Wait until line noise subsides and try  
again.  
About External Power Supply  
When you connect the optional battery case CE-76BC to  
the unit, power can be supplied to the unit from-the  
battery case. This helps minimize the use of the built-in  
operating batteries.  
1. Turn off the unit.  
Connect-  
ing the  
battery  
case  
2. Plug the connector of the battery case into the external  
power supply pin (located on the right side of the  
keyboard).  
l
Batteries to be used  
The following type of commercially available battery  
should be installed in the battery case:  
Alkaline battery (LR03 or  
x 6  
273  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Points to Remember When Using Peripherals  
When using IC cards formatted for units other than  
Series:  
l
Cards that are 3.4 mm thick, such as the  
and  
application cards of the format, cannot  
be used with this unit. Forcing these cards into the  
unit may cause damage.  
l
l
The  
and IQ-8802 cards cannot be  
used with this unit.  
The following keys on this unit cannot be used (refer to  
the card operation manual as regards the other  
keys):  
(SEND)  
(CUT) (MENU)  
key mentioned in IC card operation  
manuals is re resented b the key on this unit.  
key operation is  
then touching  
operation by pressing (2nd)  
(DATE  
[PRINT SCREEN)  
l
The  
Also, the  
performed by  
the  
and  
The displays for these operations might be  
different from those in the card manuals.  
To transfer data from a card, first select card memory,  
To transfer data from the unit,  
l
touch PERIPHERALS after  
selecting any application on the unit. To use the  
Memory Check or Data Deletion functions with a card,  
first select card memory then press  
.
l
l
You cannot move the cursor by touching the IC card  
window and you cannot highlight text in it by dragging.  
Use the cursor keys to move the cursor.  
When using the  
IQ-71 1 B,  
you can enter data in the  
However, you  
clipboard by pressing  
cannot enter data in the clipboard if the amount of free  
memory is small.  
l
The following cards can be used in conjunction with  
most of the unit’s built-in applications. Press  
to access these dictionaries while using a  
274  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
built-in application:  
IQ-71 1 B, IQ-71  
IQ-8DOI A  
TIME/DATE STAMP functions can be used by pressing  
IQ-71  
IQ-71  
P r e s s i n g  
t h e n e n t e r s t h e  
time, pressing  
enters the date, and pressing  
(SPACE] enters both the time and the date.  
To enter special symbols, press  
to display the  
list of symbols and then enter the number  
corresponding to the symbol you want.  
When using the  
or IQ-8C02, the  
Clock window may be displayed longer than usual.  
Press any key to close the window.  
When using the IQ-720, the  
window cannot be  
opened.  
When using the  
you cannot use Calendar  
application for a date entry.  
When using an IC card supporting multiple languages,  
including English, all messages are shown in English  
and cannot be switched to another language.  
When using Organizer Link software designed for an  
unit other than the  
Series:  
l
Data in applications that are not supported by the  
Organizer Link cannot be sent.  
(USER FILE 1 corresponds to Business Card in the  
8000 Series.)  
l
l
If you attempt to transfer an entry that contains more  
than a certain number of characters over the unit Link,  
only that number of characters will be transferred.  
The Notebook entry tab codes on your unit are  
converted carriage return characters on a computer.  
J
If you restore Notebook entries back to your unit, these  
converted to carriage returns will not be changed back  
to tab codes, so the original layout will not be  
reproduced. Similarly, restored font styles will not be  
reproduced correctly.  
l
The first 20 characters, or the text on the first line, of a  
Memo entry received in the Notebook application are  
entered as the title and also appear in the text field.  
275  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
When you restore the data back to the computer, the  
title and the first 20 characters are redundant.  
The names and contents of free fields in the Tel  
application cannot be sent over a 7000 Series  
Organizer Link.  
l
l
When using an 8000 Series Organizer Link:  
l
You cannot transfer the following data. No error  
message will be displayed if these transfers are  
attempted, but the data will not be transferred to your  
unit.  
. DAILY ALARM  
l
TEL FILE NAME  
l
TEL/BUSINESS CARD (corresponds to USER FILE  
1 in the  
USER’S DICTIONARY (corresponds to the Word  
key function in the Series)  
Series) FREE FIELD NAME  
l
l
You cannot transfer an entry from USER FILE 1  
(BUSINESS) of the User File application if it has no  
data in its NAME field. It is also impossible to transfer  
any complete file that contains such an entry.  
When receiving data from an unit other than the  
Series or when using an Organizer Link  
designed for another Organizer:  
l
If an Outline entry is more than 32 Kbytes in size, only  
the first 32 Kbytes of data will be received in a  
9000 Series unit. Any subsequent text will not be  
transferred.  
l
For Memo entries received in the Notebook application:  
l
The first 20 characters, or the text on the first line, will  
be entered as a title and will also appear in the text  
field.  
l
The number of pages displayed in the index mode  
will be  
. Once the data has been transferred, open  
the entry in the Edit or View mode to display the  
number correctly.  
l
Only data in applications/modes can be transferred.  
(Data in the Period mode of the 6000 and 8000 Series  
cannot be received in a  
Series unit.)  
276  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
l
If you have used free fields in Telephone or  
on your other unit, you must set the number of fields in  
Telephone (or  
on the  
Series  
Organizer to be the same (e.g. 8 for the 8000 series)  
BEFORE transferring the information to the  
Series unit. Otherwise the data in the free fields will not  
be transferred onto the  
Series unit. Also, if  
the type of a field (text or picture) is different in the two  
units, it cannot be transferred.  
l
When transferring Business Card entries from- a 6000  
or 8000 Series Organizer to USER FILE 1 or vice  
versa, the data will be entered into the corresponding  
fields. Even if the fields for USER FILE 1 are renamed,  
the data will be transferred to or from the fields with the  
corresponding default names.  
When transferring a Business Card entry, if receiving  
the contents of a field would make an entry exceed  
2048 characters, which is the limit for a USER FILE 1  
entry, neither that field nor any subsequent fields of the  
Business Card entry are transferred.  
l
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
278  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ersonalizing  
P
Your Unit  
Now that you have an understanding of all  
of the unit’s functions and its operation, it’s  
time to take a look at the ways you can  
configure the unit to your individual  
preferences: the display can show selected  
user information at start-up, entries can be  
made secure through password protection  
and by marking them as secret, and the  
Calendar display can be set to a format  
that’s best for you.  
279  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The Start-Up Display  
The unit can display your name, telephone number, and  
address every time it is turned on, set against one of two  
graphic backgrounds (one of which you can create using  
the Scrapbook application). If you ever lost or misplaced  
the unit, this could significantly increase the chances of  
having it returned to you.  
Setting the 1.  
start-up  
Press (MENU) and touch  
menu, then select SET START-UP DISPLAY.  
to open the TOOLS  
display  
SET START-UP DISPLAY contains several fields. Current  
selections are shown in reverse.  
SET  
START- UP  
START- UP  
. BACKGROUND .  
. USER'. S. PI . CTURE  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. USER'. S.  
. [ P.a s t .e. . p.i. c t .ur e . . he r e ]  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. AS.K . PASSWORD; . . ON .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. OWNER.  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
TEL NUMBER  
.
.
.
.
__  
ADDRESS  
START-UP  
l
ON: Turns on a user-specified display upon start-up.  
OFF: The unit starts up in the application or display  
mode that was in use when the unit was turned off.  
DEMO: Sets the unit to display its built-in demo at  
start-up. This is the default display.  
l
l
BACKGROUND  
Choose between the built-in background GLOBE or  
USER’s PICTURE, which selects a graphic image  
pasted to the USER’S PICTURE field. The selected  
background is displayed at start-up.  
USER’S  
Any graphic image pasted to this field and selected in  
the BACKGROUND field (above) is displayed at  
start-up. (For an explanation of how to paste graphic  
images, see p. 130.)  
280  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ASK PASSWORD  
l
ON: After registering a password (see p.  
you  
will be prompted to enter that password upon  
start-up. The unit cannot be used if the password is  
not entered.  
l
OFF: You will not be prompted to enter your  
password upon start-up.  
OWNER  
Enter your name (up to 25 characters).  
TEL NUMBER  
Enter your telephone number (up to 20 characters).  
ADDRESS  
Enter your address (up to 75 characters).  
The BACKGROUND field and all fields listed below it are  
activated only if “ON” is selected in the START-UP field.  
2. Select the desired setting in each field.  
Enter your name, telephone number, and address in the  
appropriate fields. (You can leave any or all of these  
fields blank if you wish.)  
3.  
SET  
START- UP DI SPLAY  
. [ P.a s t .e p.i. c t .ur e. . he r e ]  
. USER'. S.  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. ASK  
. ON.  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. OLI .VI. A. .HAMI L. TON  
. OWNER .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
TEL NUMBER  
4.  
Touch  
to store the settings (or  
to  
cancel any changes).  
If you have set START-UP and ASK PASSWORD to ON,  
and filled in your personal information, a display similar to  
the one below will appear every time the unit is turned on.  
Responses  
to the  
281  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
This Organizer belongs to  
OLIVIA HAMI LTON  
TEL: 185-663-952 1  
BROADWAY, NEW YORK  
701  
or d:  
To use any function of the unit,  
1. Type in the password as used for the Secret function.  
You must enter the password exactly as you registered it,  
including upper- and lower-case letters.  
2. Press  
ENTER PASSWORD disappears.  
3. Touch  
or  
to go directly to these  
Calendar views, or press the key for any application you  
want to use.  
l
If no password has been registered, the prompt for the  
password will not be displayed even if ASK  
PASSWORD has been set to ON.  
l
If you set ASK PASSWORD to ON with START-UP set  
to ON and you forget your registered password, to  
access the unit you will have to reset the unit, losing all  
the data stored in it (see 299).  
The Secret Function  
The Secret function keeps information in your unit secure  
by locking it with a password that you specify. Entries  
marked as secret are hidden from all displays until the  
password is entered. Individual entries can be marked as  
“secret,” so that only someone who knows the password  
can access them, or all entries and operations can be  
282  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
protected using the PASSWORD feature from SET  
START-UP DISPLAY in the TOOLS menu (see above, p.  
276). Marking entries as secret has no effect until a  
password is entered in the unit.  
1. Press  
and touch  
to open the TOOLS  
ing a  
menu.  
password  
2. Select LOCK/UNLOCK ORGANIZER from the menu, then  
LOCK ORGANIZER from the submenu.  
A LOCK ORGANIZER text box appears prompting you to  
enter a password.  
LOCK ORGANIZER  
Type in a password:  
Touching [LOCK] will hide all  
secret entries until you unlock  
the  
3. Enter any password up to seven characters long. Letters,  
numbers, and symbols can all be used. This text box is  
case sensitive, which means that upper- and lower-case  
letters are not  
as being the same. The  
password SECRET, for example, is different from the  
passwords Secret or secret  
Choose your password wisely. If you forget your  
password, there is no way to bypass the Secret function  
or enter a new password without losing all data marked  
as secret. It is strongly recommended that you use a  
significant password-one that you will always be able to  
remember.  
4. Touch  
to store the password (or  
to  
cancel the operation).  
This “locks” the unit, making it impossible to access any  
data marked as secret without entering the password.  
283  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
A message appears warning you not to forget the  
password. If you have any doubt about whether or not  
you will always be able to recall this password, write it  
down and keep the record of it in a safe place.  
5.  
Touch  
appears on the display, indicating that any information  
you mark as secret will now be hidden. The unit itself can  
still be accessed until you turn on the ASK PASSWORD  
feature in the SET START-UP DISPLAY window. See p.  
280.  
You can also use  
window.  
to open the LOCK  
Marking/  
unmarking  
entries as  
secret  
You can mark or unmark any entry except those in the  
Scrapbook application as secret in the View or Edit  
mode.  
1.  
Open the application containing the entry you want to  
mark as secret.  
2.  
Display the entry in either the View or Edit mode.  
SET  
3. Press  
, touch  
and  
SECRET STATUS.  
4.  
Touch SECRET. An asterisk appears in the top left  
corner.  
You can also press  
secret or non-secret.  
in step 3 above to set  
If the unit has been locked (which hides all secret entries)  
an entry which has just been marked as secret will  
remain displayed until you go to another entry. Once you  
leave the entry marked as secret, it will be hidden with all  
other secret entries (for more information, see the next  
section).  
Accessing  
secret  
entries  
Entries marked as secret are not shown in any of the  
unit’s display modes, and cannot be accessed using any  
of the search methods. To be able to view and recall  
secret entries, the unit must first be unlocked.  
284  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Press  
and touch  
to open the TOOLS  
menu. Select LOCK/UNLOCK ORGANIZER, then  
UNLOCK ORGANIZER.  
A window appears, prompting you to enter your password.  
UNLOCK ORGAN1 ZER  
Ent er  
your  
pas s wor d:  
Touchi ng  
s ecr et  
will make all  
accessible.  
as you registered it  
2. Enter your password exactly  
(remember that the text box is case  
sensitive-distinguishing between upper- and lower-case  
letters).  
3. Touch  
disappears.  
If the password is incorrect, a message appears  
indicating this.  
4. After unlocking the unit, access any entry you want using  
the normal procedures.  
You can also use (2nd)  
ORGANIZER window.  
to open the UNLOCK  
If you forget your password, it will be impossible to unlock  
the unit. If this occurs, you will have to delete the old  
password to be able to continue to use the Secret  
function. This will also delete all entries marked as secret.  
For a full explanation of what to do if this occurs, see  
below, 287.  
You can use  
to find only those entries marked  
as secret (see  
285  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Locking the  
unit  
Once a password has been registered, even though you  
unlock the unit using the procedure above, the unit will  
automatically lock itself each time you turn it off. This  
automatic lock feature guards your secret data in case  
you forget to  
the unit. The feature remains in effect  
as long as a password is registered.  
You can also lock the unit yourself at any time:  
1. Press  
and touch  
to open the TOOLS  
menu.  
2. Select LOCK/UNLOCK ORGANIZER.  
3. Select LOCK ORGANIZER.  
appears, indicating that the unit is locked.  
You can also lock the unit simply by pressing  
Changing or To register a new password, the current one must first be  
deleting the deleted.  
1. Press (MENU) and touch  
to open the TOOLS  
menu.  
2. Select DELETE PASSWORD.  
DELETE PASSWORD  
Ent er your pas s wor d:  
Touchi ng [ DELETE] will delete your  
pa s s wor d a nd UNLOCK t he or ga ni z e r .  
3. Enter your password exactly as you registered it  
(remember that the text box is case  
sensitive-distinguishing between upper- and lower-case  
letters).  
4. Touch  
286  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
A message appears indicating that the unit is unlocked.  
Entries that were marked as secret can be accessed until  
a new password is registered (to register a new  
password, use the procedure for “Registering a  
password” on p. 283).  
If you have forgotten your password, the only way you  
will be able to delete it and continue to use the Secret  
function is to delete all entries marked as secret.  
If you  
forget your  
password...  
1. Press  
and touch  
to open the TOOLS  
menu.  
2. Touch MORE TOOLS.  
3. Select DELETE ALL SECRET DATA.  
A warning message appears asking if you are sure you  
want to delete all the secret entries. If you have forgotten  
your password, you have no choice but to proceed.  
4. Touch  
to delete all secret entries. This will make it  
possible for you to enter a new password.  
l
If an optional RAM card is installed on which the same  
password is registered as that for the unit, the secret  
data on the card will also be deleted by this operation.  
l
If you set ASK PASSWORD in the SET START-UP  
display to ON, and forget your password, you will have  
to do an all reset operation (see p. 299).  
If you are using a RAM card in the unit, the card is also  
protected by any password that you register. If you  
remove a RAM card and change your password, or  
register a password for the first time, you will be unable  
to use the card in the unit again unless you re-register  
the original password, or delete your password,  
respectively. It is therefore crucial to keep track of any  
passwords used with specific RAM cards. Also, before  
you use a new RAM card for the first time, you must  
delete any registered password or the unit will not  
the card (see “Changing or deleting the  
RAM cards  
and the  
Secret  
function  
password” on p. 286).  
287  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Changing the Calendar Display Format  
The unit lets you change the default Calendar display to  
one you find more convenient. There are three aspects to  
changing the display: setting the date format, setting the  
monthly format, and setting up the Calendar. You can  
use any or all of them to create a display that you like.  
You can set dates to be shown in a month/day/year (this  
is the default) or day.month.year format in the Calendar,  
Schedule and To Do applications, as well as in the  
Clock application, etc.  
Setting the  
date format  
In the Calendar application,  
1. Press  
, touch  
and select SET UP  
DATE FORMAT.  
A submenu appears. The current setting is indicated by  
an asterisk.  
2. Select the desired format.  
You can set the Monthly and Three-month views in the  
Calendar application to show the weeks in a Sunday to  
Saturday (this is the default) or Monday to Sunday format.  
Setting the  
monthly  
format  
In the Calendar application,  
1. Press  
, touch  
, and select SET UP  
MONTHLY FORMAT.  
A submenu appears. The current setting is indicated by  
an asterisk.  
288  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2. Select the desired format.  
You can set up the Calendar to show either a Monthly or  
Setting up  
Weekly view each time the Calender application is  
the Calendar  
opened. The default setting is the Monthly view.  
In the Calendar application,  
1. Press  
, touch [MODIFY] and select SET UP  
[CALENDAR].  
setting is indicated by  
A submenu appears. The current  
an asterisk.  
2. Select the desired format.  
289  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
290  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
A. List of Key Notations  
B. ASCII Control Code Table  
C. Resetting the unit  
D. Troubleshooting  
E. Battery Replacement  
F. Specifications  
291  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
A. List of Key Notations  
Representation in text  
Function  
Opens the Calendar application.  
Opens the Schedule application.  
(S2nhdo) w s t h e s c h e d u l e o f t h e c u r r e n t d a y .  
Opens application menus. Functions the  
same as on the keyboard.  
[MEN U)  
Opens the To Do application.  
(ANN)  
Opens the Ann application. Subsequent  
presses switch between ANN 1 and ANN 2  
files.  
Opens the  
application. Subsequent  
presses switch to paperless printer mode,  
then to date calculator mode, then back to  
standard  
Mode.  
Opens the Tel application. Subsequent  
presses switch between  
TEL3 files.  
, TEL2 and  
Opens the User File application.  
Subsequent presses switch between USER  
FILE 1, 2, and 3.  
Touch and hold to display the time and date  
on the built-in clock.  
Opens the Notebook application.  
Opens the Outline application.  
Opens the Scrapbook application.  
Opens the Filer application.  
Calls the Search function.  
(SEARCH)  
292  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Function  
Representation in text  
Accesses any installed IC card.  
Turns the unit on.  
ON  
0
Interrupts printing or data transfer.  
Turns the unit off.  
Calculator application function keys.  
(xl  
selection. Automatically activated  
in appropriate applications.  
((  
AM M )  
P
)
as symbols.  
Enter  
and  
Switches between the 12-hour and 24-hour  
time display format. Automatically activated  
when setting the time.  
Sets/cancels Schedule alarms.  
Sets/resets an entry for daily alarms.  
Opens application menus.  
Clears an unstored entry.  
Cancels a selection, menu, or operation to  
return to the previous display.  
Enters the question mark.  
Enters the double quotation mark.  
Moves topics in the Outline application.  
293  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Representation in text  
Function  
Expands/collapses topics in the Outline  
Opens a new entry in an application.  
Clears field contents when entering/editing  
(EDIT)  
Opens the Edit mode so that an entry can be  
edited.  
(EDIT)  
Stores an entry as a copy so that you can  
save the original entry and edit the duplicated  
entry in the Notebook application.  
Moves the cursor one character to the left.  
Moves the cursor to the beginning of a line.  
Turns the keying sound on and off.  
Equivalent to KEY SOUND ON/OFF in the  
TOOLS menu.  
0
Moves the cursor one line up. Scrolls the  
display up.  
Moves the cursor to the beginning of a field  
(in edit-mode) and also scrolls the displays  
one by one (in view mode) in the Notebook  
application. Moves the cursor to the first line  
of a field in other applications.  
an entry as secret.  
(2nd)  
Moves the cursor one line down. Scrolls the  
display down.  
Moves the cursor to the end of a field (in edit  
mode) and also scrolls the displays one by  
one (in view mode) in the Notebook  
application. Moves the cursor to the last line  
of a field in other applications.  
Locks/unlocks the unit. Equivalent to  
LOCK/UNLOCK ORGANIZER in the TOOLS  
menu.  
(
Moves the cursor one character to the right.  
Moves the cursor to the end of a line.  
Disables/enables all set alarms. Equivalent to  
ENABLE/DISABLE ALARM in the TOOLS  
menu.  
0
294  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Function  
Representation in text  
Moves the cursor between fields.  
Steps up through entries/screens.  
Continues to search backwards for a keyword.  
PREV  
NEXT  
Moves the cursor between fields.  
Steps down through entries/screens.  
Continues to search forwards for a keyword.  
Enter numerals 1-O.  
Enter symbols.  
The backspace key. Deletes the character to  
the left of the cursor.  
+/-  
Sign change key in  
Enters the symbol  
Enter the letters A-Z.  
mode.  
m
Stamps the current local time at the cursor  
location in an entry.  
(TIME STAMP)  
Enter font settings in the Notebook  
application: plain, underline, italic and bold,  
respectively.  
Prints the current display when a printer is  
connected.  
(PRINT  
(DATE  
Stamps the current local date at the cursor  
location in an entry.  
Searches for a specific text in the Notebook  
application.  
Calls the on-line help feature.  
(2nd) [HELP)  
Enter accent marks: ,  
respectively.  
, , ,  
Press the keys and type a letter to create  
accented characters.  
295  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Representation in text  
Function  
Opens the TOOLS menu. (Equivalent to  
Opens the PERIPHERALS menu. (Equivalent  
to PERIPHERALS  
In the Scrapbook application, converts the  
touch pen to drawinq tools.  
USE ERASER  
In the Scrapbook application,  
touch to an eraser.  
the  
[El  
0
USE AREA TOOLS  
In the Scrapbook application, marks areas to  
cut, COPY, paste or delete.  
Enters a carriage return.  
Enters a tab in the Notebook application.  
Switches the letter keys between upper and  
lower case when pressed. Enters a symbol in  
white above a key when held while the key is  
pressed.  
(2nd) (CUT)  
Cuts a specified text/picture or a selected  
entry to the clipboard for pasting to another  
location.  
(2nd)  
Copies a specified text/picture or a selected  
entry to the clipboard for pasting to another  
location.  
Places a text/picture in the clipboard at the  
cursor location.  
Enters the French character  
Enters a comma.  
(
Enters the German character  
Enters a quotation mark.  
Enters a period. In calculations, the period  
entered from the keyboard acts as a decimal  
point.  
.
Enters a colon.  
Enters a semicolon.  
296  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Function  
Representation in text  
Caps lock key. Switches the letter keys  
between upper- and lower-case modes.  
CAPS  
2 n d  
Press this key then another key to access  
any second function indicated in blue above  
the key. Also accesses keyboard shortcuts.  
2nd  
0
Accesses a user word list.  
Perfbrms a square root calculation in  
mode.  
0
Enters  
as a symbol.  
Accesses the symbol menus.  
Checks off the To Do entries.  
0
Enters  
as a symbol.  
The space key.  
Toggles between insert and overwrite mode  
when entering/editing data.  
INS  
0
INS  
Deletes a character at the cursor position  
when entering/editing data.  
Deletes entries when viewing data.  
Deletes a line at the cursor location.  
Executes operations.  
Stores entries in memory.  
(ENTER)  
(ENTER)  
Stores an edited entry as new, leaving the  
original unchanged.  
Receives data via the infrared port from a  
9000 Series unit.  
G E T  
0
Sends data via the infrared port to a  
9000 Series unit.  
Prints the selected entry or folder when a  
printer is connected.  
(2nd)  
297  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
B. ASCII Control Code Table  
The table below lists the key combinations required to  
generate the ASCII control codes in the Terminal mode.  
Hex Value  
Key Combination  
ASCII Code  
00  
01  
NUL  
SOH  
STX  
. ETX  
EOT  
ENQ  
ACK  
BEL  
BS  
02  
03  
04  
05  
06  
07  
08  
09  
OA  
OB  
oc  
OD  
OE  
OF  
HT  
LF  
VT  
FF  
CR  
s o  
M or  
or  
DLE  
DC2  
DC4  
NAK  
SYN  
ETB  
CAN  
EM  
12  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
IA  
(M-IV  
SUB  
ESC  
FS  
ID  
IF  
GS  
RS  
u s  
M -  
0
0
298  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
C. Resetting the Unit  
A strong impact, exposure to an electrical field, or other  
unusual conditions may render the unit inoperative, and  
pressing the keys or touch buttons will have no effect. If  
this occurs, you will have to press the RESET switch on  
the back of the unit using the touch pen or similar object  
to be able to continue to use the unit.  
perative may erase  
some or all of the data stored in memory.  
l
Do not use anything breakable, anything with a sharp  
tip or anything that might break to press the RESET  
switch.  
If the unit still fails to function after it has been reset using  
the procedure above, or you have forgotten the password  
to be entered in the start-up display, you will have to  
reset it using a slightly more complicated procedure:  
All reset  
operation  
1.  
While pressing and holding (ON), press and release the  
RESET switch.  
A message appears.  
299  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2. Release  
3. Touch  
.
The built-in clock and any set daily alarms are reset.  
l
Do not touch  
in step 3. Doing so will delete all  
data in the unit.  
l
However, if you have forgotten the password to be  
entered in the start-up display, you have no choice but  
to touch  
the unit.  
, losing all your data, to be-able to use  
D. Troubleshooting  
Refer to the list below for solutions when the unit is not  
functioning properly before contacting your local SHARP  
dealer.  
Solution  
Problem  
l
l
l
Set the card lock switch to LOCK.  
The display remains  
blank after pressing  
ON .  
0
Adjust the LCD contrast (see  
52).  
Install new batteries (see 302).  
Poor display contrast.  
The unit is turned on,  
but pressing keys and  
touch buttons has no  
effect.  
The unit’s memory is full or nearly full.  
Delete unnecessary data or install a  
RAM card (see p. 238). (You can  
check the amount of free memory  
using CHECK MEMORY in the  
TOOLS menu. See p. 81.)  
“Not enough memory”  
displayed.  
300  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Problem  
Solution  
Enable alarms using the TOOLS  
menu (see p. 189).  
The alarm does not  
sound at the set time.  
Calibrate the touch panel (see p. 52).  
Pressing a touch  
button or touching the  
display has no effect.  
Or a function which is  
not selected is carried  
out.  
E. Battery Replacement  
The unit uses the following types of batteries:  
General  
guidelines  
Size/Model Qty.  
Use  
General  
operation  
2
LR03  
Alkaline batteries  
1
CR2032  
Memory backup Lithium battery  
There are some extremely important points to remember  
when installing new batteries:  
l
Do not remove the operating and backup batteries at  
the same time. Doing so will result in the loss of all  
data stored in the unit’s memory.  
l
l
Backup all important data before replacing the batteries.  
Remove any installed IC card before replacing the  
301  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
batteries. If an IC card contains its own batteries,  
confirm that those batteries are not depleted before  
removing the card from the unit.  
l
l
Replace the two operating batteries at the same time  
with new batteries of the same type.  
The memory backup battery installed at the factory at  
the time of manufacture may have become depleted  
during shipment and may not have the full battery life  
indicated in the specifications.  
Caution:  
l
Keep batteries out of the reach of children.  
l
Remove batteries from the unit when they become  
weak or when the unit is not to be used for a long  
period of time. Leaving weak batteries in the unit may  
cause battery leakage and damage from corrosion.  
l
Do not dispose of batteries by fire as they may explode.  
Replacing  
the operating top of the display, the operating batteries may need to be  
When using the unit, if the  
symbol appears at the  
batteries  
replaced. To confirm this, turn the unit off and then on  
again. If the display shown below appears, replace both  
of the operating batteries immediately.  
1. Turn off the unit.  
2. Set the battery replacement switch on the back of the unit  
to “REPLACE BATTERIES” (a red dot will be visible).  
3. Slide off the operation battery cover.  
302  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Battery replacement switch  
4. Remove the old batteries by pulling the ribbon tab.  
5. Insert the two new batteries atop the ribbon tab,  
positioning them according to plus  
polarity, as shown below.  
and minus  
6. Replace the operation battery cover.  
7. Set the battery replacement switch to “NORMAL  
OPERATION.”  
If nothing happens when you press  
l
Setting the battery replacement switch to “REPLACE  
BATTERIES” shuts off power to the unit. Check that the  
battery replacement switch is set to “NORMAL  
OPERATION.”  
l
l
Check that the card lock switch is set to LOCK,  
Repeat the above battery replacement procedure step  
by step.  
303  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Replacing  
the memory approximately five years under normal conditions  
The unit’s memory backup battery has an expected life of  
(temperature extremes can shorten the life of the battery).  
Replace the memory backup battery every five years or  
whenever the following display appears.  
backup  
battery  
Replace main memory back-up  
battery.  
Please read the operation  
nanual for directions.  
Do not try to replace the memory backup battery if the  
operating batteries are weak. Doing so may result in the  
loss of all data in the unit. If necessary, replace the  
operating batteries before replacing the memory backup  
battery.  
1. Turn off the unit.  
2. Set the battery replacement switch on the back of the unit  
to “REPLACE BATTERIES” (a red dot will be visible).  
3. Remove the screw holding  
cover in place.  
the memory backup battery  
4. Remove the memory backup cover.  
304  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5. Remove the old battery using the touch pen or a similar  
object.  
6. Insert a new battery with the plus  
side up.  
8. Replace the memory backup battery cover and secure it  
with the screw.  
9. Set the battery replacement switch to “NORMAL  
OPERATION”.  
If nothing happens when you press  
:
l
Setting the battery replacement switch to “REPLACE  
305  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
BATTERIES” shuts off power to the unit. Check that the  
battery replacement switch is set to “NORMAL  
OPERATION.”  
l
l
Check that the card lock switch is set to LOCK,  
Repeat the above battery replacement procedure step  
by step.  
Specifications  
Model  
Display  
240 x 160 dot matrix liquid crystal  
display  
Electronic unit section  
Applications  
Calendar, Schedule, To Do,  
Anniversary, Telephone, User File,  
Notebook, Outline, Scrapbook, Filer  
Memory capacity IQ-8900  
256 Kbytes (User area: Approx. 135  
Kbytes)  
Schedule application capacity:  
Approx. 2,130 entries  
Tel application capacity:  
Approx. 2,100 entries  
IQ-8920  
512 Kbytes (User area: Approx. 391  
Kbytes)  
Schedule application capacity:  
Approx. 6,900 entries  
Tel application capacity:  
Approx. 6,780 entries  
These capacities assume the following  
average entry sizes and only apply  
when all the available memory is  
committed to a single function.  
Schedule: 32 characters/entry  
306  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Tel: 16 characters/entry in the name  
field  
12 characters/entry in the number  
field  
Notebook: 16 Kbytes  
Maximum  
data size per  
entry  
32 Kbytes for an entire  
Outline:  
outline  
2 Kbytes for each topic  
Tel/User File: 2 Kbytes for text data  
61.7 Kbytes for graphics  
data  
Other applications: 2 Kbytes  
Touch panel, keyboard  
User interfaces  
Other features  
Secret function, data transfer, search  
function, help function, etc.  
Calculator  
Digits  
IO  
Addition, subtraction, multiplication,  
division; constant, square root,  
percent, memory calculation, date  
calculation, paperless printer.  
Functions  
Clock  
Crystal oscillation 32,768 Hz  
frequency  
Accuracy  
Average variance per day, 1.5  
seconds (at  
Year, month, day, day of the week,  
hours, minutes, AM/PM, city names.  
Display  
information  
or 24-hour  
Time system  
Display of date and time for the  
world’s cities.  
Other functions  
Enable/disable daylight saving time  
display function.  
307  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Peripherals and transfer interface  
I R transfer  
Cable jack  
IC card slot  
Up to a distance of approx. 80 cm.  
1
Common  
Power  
Battery:  
Main supply:  
3 V  
DC, alkaline batteries  
(LR03 x 2)  
Memory backup:  
3 V DC, lithium battery  
(CR2032 x I)  
Power  
consumption  
0.29  
Battery life  
Battery life may vary depending on  
usage.  
Operating batteries:  
l
Approx. 70 hours (2 months of  
hour continuous use per day)  
Continuous display at an ambient  
temperature of  
(73°F)  
l
Approx. 50 hours (1.5 months of 1  
hour continuous use per day)  
Searching data for 5 minutes and  
display on for 55 minutes per hour,  
at an ambient temperature of  
(73°F)  
Memory backup battery:  
Approx. 5 years (regardless of the  
condition of the operating batteries)  
Operating  
0” to 40°C (32” to 104°F)  
temperature  
308  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Dimensions  
Open  
155(W) x 177(D) x  
mm  
x 6-31/32”(D) x  
25/32”(H)  
Closed 155(W) x 97(D) x 23.9(H) mm  
x
x
300 g (0.66 lb) (including batteries)  
Weight  
Alkaline batteries LR03 x 2, lithium  
battery CR2032 x 1 (installed),  
operation manual, protection card  
(installed), touch pen  
Accessories  
309  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Operating 301, 302  
Replacement 301  
A
Accessing  
BBS 253  
Blocks  
Remote computer 260, 261  
Secret entries 284  
Adding  
Copying/moving 207  
Working with blocks of text 71  
Break code 264  
Categories 115  
Picture to an entry 130  
Text to graphic entries 194  
Topics 162  
C
application 174  
Using with other applications  
179  
User’s city 186  
Alarms  
Daily 188  
Calculation  
Disabling all alarm sounds 189  
Changing part of 177  
Schedule 102  
Examples 181  
All reset 299  
Inserting figures into 176  
Performing 174  
With dates 177  
Calendar application 86  
Setting up the initial display 288  
Calendar view 86  
Daily 89  
application 119  
Application 55  
Opening 62  
Application  
cards 220  
Application keys 47  
ASCII control code 298  
ASCII transfer protocol 264  
Assigning  
Monthly 87  
Selecting 86  
Due date 106  
Three-month 87  
Entries to Filer folders 199  
Weekly 88  
Priority 105  
Weekly Graph 88  
Call  
Auto log-on 268  
Automatic dialing 232  
Hanging up 261  
Auto power off 51  
Making 260  
Receiving 262  
Cancelling indents 150  
Caring for the unit 42  
Categories 112  
Adding 115  
B
Backing up data 240  
Battery  
Installing 48  
Life 309  
Assigning to entries 113  
Memory backup 301, 304  
311  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Category list 113  
Deleting 116  
Editing 115  
D
Daily alarms  
Setting 188  
Reviewing by category 114  
Turning on/off 189  
Daily view 89  
Changing  
(see also Customizing)  
Calendar format 288  
Character size 145  
Character/font styles 146  
Dialing entry settings 260  
Home city 182  
Date calculation 177  
Date format 68  
Setting 288  
Date stamp 211  
Daylight saving time (DST) 187  
Assigning to a city 187  
Enabling/disabling 187  
Deleting  
Indents 150  
Checking  
Current time/date 81  
Intermediate results of a  
calculation 176  
All entries in an application 98,  
All To Do entries in current view  
117  
Memory 81  
Time in a city 185  
Checking off To Do entries 111  
Clock application 182  
Collapsing outline families 168  
CompuServe 253  
All secret entries 287  
Categories 116  
Contents of picture fields 132  
Filtered entries 215  
Graphic entries 80  
Auto log-on for 268  
Data transfer via 267  
Connecting a fax/modem 228  
Copy 71, 130, 207, 209  
Copying  
Line in a calculation 177  
Schedules over a specific  
period 98  
Single entries 75, 97, 122, 129,  
Blocks of text 71, 207  
Entries 209  
Text 70  
Topics 165  
Graphics to picture fields 130  
Sections of graphic entries 193  
Cover sheet 231  
Using the application menu 76  
Dialing directory  
Setting 256  
Preview display 235  
Using 235  
Sample 231  
Display  
Setting the LCD contrast 52  
Symbols 57  
Display modes 62  
Cursor 68  
Customizing  
Index display 136  
Tel/User File applications 133  
Cut 71, 130, 207, 209  
Edit mode 64  
Index mode 62  
Selecting 62  
View mode 63  
312  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Downloading 266  
Drawing tools 77  
By date 74  
By topic 74  
Graphic entries 79  
Using keywords 73, 96, 109,  
121, 127, 143  
E
Edit mode 64  
Editing techniques 67  
Editing  
Using the Calendar views 91,  
96,  
121  
Using the Index mode 95, 107,  
121, 127, 142  
(see also Revising)  
Categories 115  
Contents of picture fields 131  
Entries 96, 109, 122, 129, 144  
Speed button information 237  
Emulation  
Folders  
Assigning entries to 199  
Deleting all entries in 206  
IN 198  
Printer 223  
Merging 205  
Naming/renaming 202  
Sharing 206  
Terminal 258, 270  
Entering  
Viewing the contents of 203  
Unassigning entries from 204  
Monthly goals  
Subtopics 167  
Font  
Error indicator 180  
Expanding families 169  
External power supply 273  
Changing size 145  
Changing styles 146  
Selecting font type for printing  
155  
Families  
H
Collapsing 168  
Expanding 169  
Help 58  
Restructuring 170  
Fax/modem 227  
Fields 67  
Home city 49, 182  
I
Moving between 70  
Picture 67, 130  
IC cards 220, 274  
Installing 220  
IN folder 198  
Indents  
Filer application 198  
Filer Drawer 198  
Filter function 213  
Deleting filtered entries 215  
Turning off 215  
150  
Setting 148  
Index mode 62  
Infrared transfer  
Setting up 246  
Notes on 245  
Turning on 214  
Finding entries 72, 91, 95, 107,  
121, 127, 142  
(see also Search)  
313  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Inserting  
Monthly goals 104  
Entering 106  
Page break 154  
Text 70  
Topic 162  
Installing  
Monthly view 87  
Setting the format of 288  
Moving  
Batteries 48  
IC cards 220  
Appointments 96  
Between fields 70  
Blocks of text 207  
Entries 209  
J
Joining two topics into one 163  
Sections of graphic entries 193  
Topics 163  
K
Key beep 54  
Keyboard 57  
Function/notation list 292  
N
New entries  
Creating based on an existing  
one 210  
Making 65, 78, 93, 104, 119,  
127, 140, 191  
L
Line type 255  
Locking the unit 286  
Level converter CE-137T 228  
Notebook application 140  
Null modem adaptor 253  
M
0
Manual  
Link 251, 274  
Overwriting text 70  
Construction 39  
Conventions used 41  
Dialing 233  
P
Margins 152  
Page break 154  
Page header 231  
Paper size 155  
Paperless printer 175  
Part names and functions 46  
Password  
Marking entries as secret 284  
Memory check 81  
Memory expansion 239  
Menu 56  
Application 92, 103, 118, 123,  
132, 133, 157, 171, 196  
Peripherals 220  
Tools 82  
Deleting/changing 286  
Forgotten 287  
Registering 283  
Paste 71  
PC link 252  
MNP 255  
Modem  
Connecting to the unit 254  
Hardware requirements 253  
Null modem adaptor 253  
Peripherals menu 220  
Picture  
Adding to an entry 130  
314  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting 102  
Picture field 130  
Schedule application 93  
Scrapbook application 190  
Search  
Deleting the contents of 132  
Editing the contents of 131  
Viewing the contents of 131  
Power  
Auto power off 51  
Turning on and off 51  
Printing 222  
(see also Finding)  
By heading 128  
By title 143, 160  
For a specific word in an entry  
146  
All entries 227  
Search function 73, 96,  
128, 143, 160, 285  
Secret function 282  
When using RAM card 287  
Selecting  
121,  
Current display 224  
Full-size document 152  
Groups of entries 225  
Selecting paper size/font type  
for 155  
Calendar views 86  
Date 91, 99  
Setting up 223  
Single entries 225  
Display modes 62  
Font type/paper size for printing  
155  
R
RAM cards 238  
(see also IC cards)  
Backup 240  
Topics 162  
Sending a fax  
Automatic Dialing 232  
Manual Dialing 233  
Setting  
Data sharing 241  
Memory expansion 239  
Restoring data from 240  
Secret function 287  
Redial 256  
Reset 299  
Replacing  
Memory backup batteries 304  
Operating batteries 302  
Restoring data from RAM cards  
240  
Clock 49, 184  
Date format 288  
Dialing directory 256  
Fax/modem option 228  
LCD contrast 52  
Margins 152  
Monthly format 288  
Schedule alarms 102  
Tabs 151  
Revising  
Setting up  
(see also Editing)  
Graphic entries 79  
Outlines 161  
Calendar’s initial display 288  
For data transfer 242  
For printing 223  
The fax directory 230  
Speaker 256  
S
Schedule alarms 102  
Clearing 103  
315  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Special characters 216  
Specifications 306  
Speed buttons 235  
Splitting one topic into two 164  
Start-up display 280  
Responses to 281  
Setting 280  
Subtopics 167  
Entering 167  
Symbols  
In Terminal mode 264  
Points to remember when 274  
Single entries 246  
Via CompuServe 267  
Via infrared 245  
With a personal computer 251  
With a RAM card 251  
Troubleshooting 300  
In Terminal mode 271  
Turning on/off  
On the display 57  
Entering 216  
Daily alarms 189  
Key beep 54  
Power 51  
Welcome display 53  
Word wrap 152  
T
Tabs  
Setting 151  
Typing in text 68  
Tel application 126  
Terminal emulation 258, 270  
Terminal mode 253  
Hardware requirements 253  
Opening 254  
Troubleshooting 271  
Time stamp 211  
To Do application 104  
Tools menu 82  
U
Unlocking the Unit 284  
Uploading 265  
User File application 126  
User’s city 186  
V
View mode 63  
Topics  
Adding 162  
Joining two into one 163  
Moving 163  
Splitting one into two 164  
Subtopics 167  
Wake up function 256  
Weekly Graph view 88  
Weekly view 88  
Welcome display 49  
Turning off 53  
Touch buttons 41, 45  
Touch panel 55  
Calibrating 52  
Wireless interface 223, 251  
Word key 211  
Transferring data 242  
Between two 9000 Series units  
244  
Inserting words/phrases in an  
entry 213  
Deleting words/phrases 213  
Registering words/phrases 212  
Word wrap 152  
Filer folder 248  
From an Organizer other than  
9000 series 249  
World city 185  
316  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
X
XMODEM transfer protocol 264  
317  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MEMO  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MEMO  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
This apparatus complies with the requirements of BS 800 (EN 55014): 1988 and  
BS 6527 (EN 55022): 1988.  
Dieses  
stimmt mit den Bedingungen der EN 55014, 02. 1987 und der  
EN 55022, 04. 1987  
Cet appareil  
04. 1987.  
aux specifications de la EN  
02. 1987 et EN 55022,  
Dit apparaat voldoet  
1987.  
de vereiste EN 55014, 02. 1987 en EN 55022, 04.  
Apparatet opfylder kravene i EN 55014, 02. 1987 og EN 55022, 04. 1987.  
apparecchio  
in  
EN 55014, 02. 1987 e  
EN 55022, 04. 1987.  
EN 55014, 02. 1987  
EN  
55022, 04. 1987.  
Este aparelho responde  
04. 1987.  
da EN 55014, 02. 1987 e EN 55022,  
Este aparato  
las especificaciones de la EN 55014, 02. 1987 y EN  
55022, 04. 1987.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SHARP CORPORATION  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  

Shure Network Router UP4 User Manual
Silvercrest Clock KH 2600 User Manual
Sony Flat Panel Television 3 273 475 112 User Manual
Sony Home Theater Server PCS TL50 User Manual
Sony Indoor Furnishings SU 36XBR8 User Manual
Sony Speaker System SAVA 500 User Manual
Sound Storm Laboratories Projector PLC XU84 User Manual
StarTechcom TV Cables CPNT2VGAA User Manual
Sterling Plumbing Indoor Furnishings 11445 NA User Manual
Sunbeam Bread Maker BM7850 User Manual